JP6886436B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a pachinko gaming machine that is configured to be able to set any of the set values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set values. For example, there is one described in Patent Document 1. Patent Document 1 describes that the display control of the effect based on the set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of the giraffe, the elephant, and the lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more regular (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by a random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is not always possible to enhance the effect of the gaming machine in the gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value. With the goal.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation,
An advantageous state control means capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value, and an advantageous state control means.
An information output means that can output setting value information that can specify which setting value is set, and
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, at least a predetermined suggestion effect that can be executed during the variable display, a specific suggestion effect that can be executed in the advantageous state, and a plurality of times based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is provided with a specific effect that can be executed over the variable display of the above, and an effect execution means that can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a different execution ratio according to a set setting value.
The reliability of the suggestion of the set value differs depending on whether the predetermined suggestion effect is executed or the specific suggestion effect is executed.
The presentation execution means may be more capable of executing predetermined suggested directing a plurality of types of predetermined suggested state like including special predetermined suggested embodiment, the specific suggestions more plural kinds of specific suggestions state like including special specific suggestion embodiments The production can be performed,
If the predetermined suggested presentation by a special predetermined suggest embodiment is executed, the than the predetermined suggested presentation is performed by the different predetermined suggested embodiment is specially prescribed suggested embodiments, trust suggests a high advantageous set value High degree,
If said specific suggestion effect by special specified suggest embodiment is executed, the special specified than when the specific suggested presentation by different specific suggested embodiment is executed with the suggestion embodiment, trust suggests a high advantageous set value High degree,
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the effect executing means does not execute the predetermined suggestion effect according to the special predetermined suggestion mode and the specific suggestion effect according to the special specific suggestion mode. , The predetermined suggestion effect according to a predetermined suggestion mode different from the special predetermined suggestion mode, and the specific suggestion effect according to a specific suggestion mode different from the special specific suggestion mode can be executed.
further,
Display control means that can display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display,
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
The change suggestion effect execution means can execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode as the change suggestion effect.
When the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed in the predetermined period of the variable display is a predetermined number of times, the change is made in a specific period which is a period after the predetermined period of the variable display than when it is less than the predetermined number of times. It is characterized by a high rate of execution of suggestive effects.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that control of an advantageous state can be executed based on a set value, a specific effect can be executed over a plurality of variable displays, so that the effect can be enhanced. it can.
(1) Other gaming machines
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display (variable display of special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol), and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). During the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right), the next change suggestion effect is displayed. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
A specific display execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17 (E) and 18 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and 18 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display having a display size of the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display having a display size of the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of the reach title production shown in FIG. 19D) can be displayed (for example, an image). A display device 5 and a CPU 120 for effect control) are further provided.
The display means
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) composed of the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the following inventions (9) to (14). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), and the active display is displayed every time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. There was a gaming machine that changed the display mode of. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

(9) In order to achieve the above objectives, the gaming machine according to another aspect is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of (10) is
The gaming machine of (9)
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 23-3 (A), the final display of the active display). Expectations for big hits differ depending on the mode),
Depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different (as shown in FIG. 23-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous. The higher the number of hits, the higher the expectation of big hits. Even if the active display has the same display color, the higher the number of consecutive changes suggestion effects of the success mode, the higher the expectation of big hits.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of (11) is
The gaming machine of (9) or (10)
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 23-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change either)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The gaming machine of (12) is
Any gaming machine selected from (9) to (11).
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 23-18 (1)). , As shown in FIG. 23-18 (4), the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of (13) is
Any gaming machine selected from (9) to (12).
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, and a change suggestion effect in which character C appears. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-17, the rate is higher than that of the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of (14) is
Any gaming machine selected from (9) to (13).
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 23-17, character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means K1 to K7 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means K1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
The rate at which the mode of the first information changes is different from the rate at which the mode of the second information changes (as shown in FIG. 23-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003. The rate at which a mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than that of the first hold display 30TM001).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first information and the second information as the information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving the interest in the information corresponding to the variable display. At the same time, it is possible to be interested in the aspects of the first information and the second information.

The gaming machine of means K2 is
Means K1 gaming machine
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 23-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The jackpot expectation is higher when is in the red mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means K4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 23-9 (FIG. 23-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode having the same display color Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105), and the second is corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 23-9 (FIG. 23-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star-shaped display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red) in the red mode, which has the same display color, is displayed. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved and the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be interested.

The gaming machine of means K5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K4.
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 23-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means K6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first action effect and the second action effect are different in mode, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means K7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means K1 to means K6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 23-3, active). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which mode of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes has been proposed as information corresponding to variable display. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to the means L7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) is provided. ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In addition to being possible, in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. The display control of the second information (secondary hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed.
When the mode of the first information changes, at least a part of the advance notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIG. 23-11, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is When changed, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information, that is, first information and second information as information corresponding to a common variable display, the complexity of the production is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
Means L1 gaming machine
The mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change are different (as shown in FIG. 23-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display. , Sub-hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the first information and the second information have different modes after the change, the respective information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can simultaneously display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display). (As shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 can be displayed at the same time).
Depending on the mode of the first information after the change and the mode of the second information after the change, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-3, active). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is higher than the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. The jackpot expectation is higher when is in the red mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the combination of the mode of the first information and the mode of the second information, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L3.
The display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is
The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and the first corresponding display (active) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed. Display 30TM003) is displayed in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the first hold display, it is possible to display the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the first hold display (FIG. 23-9 (FIG. 23-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red mode shifts to the active display area 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle) in the red mode having the same display color Shape display) is displayed),
The second hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105), and the second is corresponding to the variable display during execution. The corresponding display (sub-active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105).
When starting the variable display corresponding to the second hold display, it is possible to display the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in the same manner as the second hold display (FIG. 23-9 (FIG. 23-9). As shown in 9) and (10), when the sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star-shaped display) in the red mode shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105, the sub-active display 30TM005c (red) in the red mode, which has the same display color, is displayed. Star-shaped display) is displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information, that is, the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display during execution, so that the information related to the variable display can be displayed. It can be improved and the mode of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information can be interested.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L4.
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the player is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is executed. The information is visible (as shown in FIG. 23-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen, and the first hold display 30TM001 and active. While the display 30TM003 is hidden, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is hidden to raise the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed to confirm the information for the variable display even during the execution of the notification effect. It can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L5.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) shifts the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display during execution to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). The second corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display during execution is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104, secondary active display area 30TM105).
The mode of the effect is different between the first action effect executed when the mode of the first correspondence display changes and the second action effect executed when the mode of the second correspondence display changes (for example, active). The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the character A appears and executes an action of throwing a ball, and the subactive action effect that changes the display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is a mode in which the character a appears. It is a mode to execute the action of flying a balloon)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first action effect and the second action effect are different in mode, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means L1 to means L6.
The display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as the first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and displays the second information. The second hold display (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary hold display area 30TM104).
When the mode of the first hold display is changed and when the mode of the second hold display is changed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 23-3, active). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. The jackpot expectation is higher when the display mode changes)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which mode of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

As shown in JP-A-2016-144583 (FIG. 36), a gaming machine has been proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to a variable display and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo-continuous variation is executed. Has been done. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display. The inventions according to the means N1 to N6 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine for improving the interest in information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols).
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
In the change suggestion effect execution means, as the change suggestion effect, the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the display mode) and the effect of suggesting a change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character D is repelled by the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode. It is possible to perform a production that does not let you
A predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state, the decorative symbol (combination of decorative symbols or pseudo-ream symbol in which re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) is provisional. In the period until the stop, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period from the start of the fluctuation to the time when any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right stops first) Correspondingly, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state favorable to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 23-16 (A), the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode] with respect to the [number of executions of the change suggestion effect]. The higher the ratio of, the higher the expectation of a big hit is likely to be. For example, when [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] is 2/3, the display mode is blue. And when it is 4/5, the display mode is a red mode with a higher expectation of a big hit.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
Means N1 gaming machine
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) differs depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003) (as shown in FIG. 23-3 (A), the jackpot expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, the ratio of which mode the corresponding display is is different (as shown in FIG. 23-16 (A), the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous. The higher the number of hits, the higher the expectation of big hits. Even if the active display has the same display color, the higher the number of consecutive changes suggestion effects of the success mode, the higher the expectation of big hits.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the number of times in which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2.
Variable display of decorative patterns is possible,
When the change suggestion effect is executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIGS. 23-18, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of fluctuation does not change either)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the change suggestion effect can be further focused on because the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not change.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N3.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears).
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a different type of change suggestion effect (for example, after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears, as shown in FIG. 23-18 (1)). , As shown in FIG. 23-18 (4), the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N4.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, and a change suggestion effect in which character C appears. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect in which character D appears,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-17, the rate is higher than that of the character A. Character D has a higher rate of executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode, and a higher rate of changing the display mode of the active display).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means N1 to means N5.
The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) includes a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Is possible to perform a change suggestion effect)
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 23-17, character A executes the next change suggestion effect more than character D). High percentage)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in which kind of change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately control the addition of a gaming medium when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the addition of a gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means A1
A gaming device capable of performing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, balls, balls, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the balls, ball lending that consumes the balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) that grants the game medium based on the signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
With
When the setting change mode is controlled, the addition of the game medium based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled). Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037). 2. The payout control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled. Computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the game machine frame open sensor detects that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No. 4. For payout control, because the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command when the setting change mode is controlled (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command). Even if the microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, it does not turn on the EXS signal.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is in the ON state of the lock switch 21TM051. And, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting value is controlled to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. During the period controlled to the setting change mode, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not execute ball lending.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine is provided.
The game control means has a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The granting means (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) can grant a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means.
When the game control means is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control means does not output the special signal (the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 for outputting the connection confirmation signal changes the setting. Executed after the mode ends, after the setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and the gaming device is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. It is possible to add a game medium based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first predetermined signal is not output (1. When the connection confirmation signal is not input, the PRDY signal is not turned on. 2. Connection confirmation. Do not turn on the PRDY signal when no command is received),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
It is a gaming machine of means A1 and
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controlling the progress of the game in the game machine is provided.
At least one of the game control means and the granting means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means (for example, an open state detecting means for detecting an open state in which the game machine frame or the door frame corresponding to the game machine is opened. A gaming machine frame equipped with a gaming machine frame opening sensor that can detect that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and a door frame opening sensor that can detect that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the addition of the gaming medium is restricted (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a is restricted. Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, it is possible to limit the addition of the gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The granting means outputs a grant preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to the input of the grant request signal from the game device (the BRQ signal is turned on), and the grant preparation signal of the grant preparation signal. When the grant command signal output from the gaming device is input in response to the input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the gaming medium is fed.
When controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the grant preparation signal is not output even if the grant request signal is input (the EXE signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible not to give the game medium when controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is used when the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When 21TM052 is on), control to the above setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is used when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When 21TM052 is off), the setting confirmation mode is controlled.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device. The invention according to the means B1 to the means B7 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of means B1
A gaming device capable of performing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, balls, balls, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes the prepaid balance, ball lending that consumes the balls, ball lending that consumes the balls, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050).
A predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) that executes a predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the game device, and
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode is provided.
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, predetermined control based on the signal output from the game device can be executed (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on and the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command are received while the connection confirmation signal is ON for payout control. Microcomputer 21TM370 can perform ball lending regardless of whether it is in the setting change mode or not),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device can be appropriately executed, and the control burden when the predetermined control is not executed while being controlled in the setting change mode can be avoided. ..

The gaming machine of means B2 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (power failure, etc.) while the predetermined control is being executed, and then the predetermined control is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting is performed. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending if the power is cut off during the execution of the ball lending, and after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without immediately resuming the ball lending).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the predetermined event occurs, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the predetermined control is being executed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the execution of ball lending. When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of the subsequent power restoration, the ball lending is not restarted and the setting is changed. Ball lending will not resume even after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is in the case where the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If), control to the above setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode control means is in the OFF state. In the case of), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game information is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after notifying the change of the set value (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029), it notifies that the game state has been initialized (display). Display the letter "C" on monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately perform control when the gaming medium passes through a specific region. The invention according to the means C1 to the means C6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a gaming medium passes through a specific region.

The gaming machine of means C1
Specific control (special) according to set values (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different) based on the game medium passing through a specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening) Specific control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing big hit determination processing in symbol process processing, and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode is provided.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
Means C1 gaming machine
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means is in the case where the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If), control to the above setting change mode,
When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting confirmation mode control means is in the OFF state. In the case of), control to the above setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the conditions that are satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed).
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized after executing the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode (after blinking the set value on the display monitor 21TM029). Notify that (display the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the game state is initialized.

The game machine of means C4
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C3.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means and the setting change mode control means and controls the progress of the game in the game machine.
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the set value in a setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when receiving a setting confirmation mode command that displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C4.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Therefore, during the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to means C5.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear process of step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is set. Due to the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330. Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means D1 to the means D5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that executes an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of means D1
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value so that it can be confirmed.
A set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the set value) for storing the set value is provided.
In the setting change mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (clear switch (clear switch (clear switch)). Control to the setting change mode based on the setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state),
In the setting confirmation mode control means, the first condition is satisfied (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control to the setting confirmation mode based on the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state).
The set value is determined based on the specific operation in the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state).
The set value storage means stores the set value before being controlled by the setting change mode when controlled by the setting change mode (stores in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously memorized without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and then. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (controlled to the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on). If this is the case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while the setting change mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
Means D1 gaming machine
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 to the ON state) when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the operation) is performed, it is controlled to the above setting change mode, and
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed and the initialization operation is not performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2.
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game state is executed.
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the display monitor 21TM029 blinks the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has been completed.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D3.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process) that has the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means, and controls the progress of the game in the game machine. Computer 100) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that executes the control of the effect.
The game control means outputs commands (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means as it is controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.
The effect control means executes notification according to the command (displays "setting change in progress" on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Setting confirmation" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be grasped that the clerk of the amusement park or the like is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means D1 to means D4.
Timing after the power supply to the game machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 is a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that 21TM052 was operated was received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch was detected" and "the operation of the setting changeover switch was detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the timing after the power supply is started.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions relating to the means E1 to the means E8 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of means E1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit judgment is different).
The set value can be changed (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the 1st terminal (10th terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) from the second terminal (7th terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (shift to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means E2 is
It is a gaming machine of means E1 and
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed).
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting is changed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to grasp that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
It is a gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting correspondence change signal). The security signal is continuously output for 30 seconds after the end of),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting is made by the specific signal even in the conventional external device which is not supposed to input the special signal. It is possible to understand that the change mode may be controlled.

The gaming machine of means E4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the setting correspondence change signal is output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E5 is
It is a gaming machine of means E4,
The setting confirmation mode can be controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Controlled to setting confirmation mode based on),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (the security signal and the setting correspondence change signal are output at the same time).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode is at least controlled by the specific signal, the setting confirmation is performed by the specific signal even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal. It is possible to grasp that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E6 is
It is a gaming machine of means E1 and
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when controlled to the setting change mode (the signal corresponding to the setting change is output when controlled to the setting change mode), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting change mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6.
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed when the power supply to the game machine is started. Prepare,
The special signal can be output when controlled in the setting confirmation mode (the signal corresponding to the setting change is output when controlled in the setting confirmation mode), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means E1 to means E7.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a changeable setting change mode, and
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051).
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the game control was received and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was operated were received from the game control microcomputer 100, "the operation of the lock switch was detected. , "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp information related to the set value, but Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The invention according to the means F1 to the means F11 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The gaming machine of means F1
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (big hit judgment processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit judgment is different).
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (it can be changed based on the operation in the setting change mode).
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) in response to the processing related to the change of the setting value (transition to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F2 is
Means F1 gaming machine
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
When the setting change mode ends, the special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting change mode ends, a number of pulses corresponding to the fixed set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine can be output from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F3 is
Means F2 gaming machine
When controlled to the setting change mode, a special signal of a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode) is output, and when the setting change mode ends. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after turning off the setting change corresponding signal once when the setting change mode ends), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped settings corresponding to the fixed set value) is set. Output the change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by a special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F3.
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
When the setting confirmation mode ends, a special signal of the special mode is output (when the setting confirmation mode ends, a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F5 is
Means F4 gaming machine
When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, a special signal of a non-special mode (a signal corresponding to a setting change that is ON during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode) is output, and when the setting confirmation mode ends. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after turning off the setting change corresponding signal once when the setting confirmation mode ends), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed setting value) Output the setting change correspondence signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by a special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F5.
In the special signal of the special aspect, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified by an external device by setting the number of times of output of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the set value can be easily specified in the external device.

The gaming machine of means F7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F6.
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
Means F7 gaming machine
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from the tenth terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside by a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
Means F7 gaming machine
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a clearly distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F9.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed is provided.
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (the setting value can be changed according to the operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052).
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, a special signal of the special mode is output upon termination of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, it is output. Regardless of whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as the setting change corresponding signal). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any gaming machine selected from means F1 to means F10.
A special signal of the special aspect is output with the end of the process related to the change of the set value (a pulse shape of a number corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting change mode). Outputs the setting change corresponding signal of, and outputs the pulsed setting change corresponding signal of the number corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode), and the special signal After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) by a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the jackpot game state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. Outputs the number of pulsed setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the set value to the outside at a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the chance that the set value can be specified in the external device.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately control the addition of a gaming medium when the set value is changed. The invention according to the means G1 to the means G10 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the addition of a gaming medium.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a granting means (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of imparting game value (pachinko balls) (pachinko gaming machine 21TM370 for controlling payout motor 21TM289).
A game that executes a process such as step S21TM1690 that can execute specific control (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (set values 1 to 6 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). Control microcomputer 100) and
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the game machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the game machine (for example, the game machine frame 3) is opened. A game provided with means (a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state). It is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300).
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the addition of the game value is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 to execute the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the addition of the game value.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
Means G1 gaming machine
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is a game machine capable of detecting that the open state detecting means (game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370) having a gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a frame opening sensor and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state) When (a state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, the processes after step S21TM3530 are executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being controlled in a state where the open state of the gaming machine frame or the door frame is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
It has a specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) that stores specific information (value of the setting changing flag) that can be specified to be controlled in the setting change mode.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The setting change mode control means can be put into a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the game machine is restarted (game). In the control microcomputer 100, when the setting changing flag is set after the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state. , If the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode and shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the normal game processing is not performed and the power is turned off.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the game can be stopped.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
Means G3 gaming machine
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting changing flag) is erased (based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), YES is determined in step S21TM3530, and the setting change mode is set. Finished, and the setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game processing after the setting change mode is finished.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to G4.
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game is provided.
The granting means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to execute the game value granting based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out. When neither the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is detected, the gaming medium is paid out),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value has the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to execute the giving of the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
Means G5 gaming machine
The granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) is
Based on the reception of the information (number of payouts) related to the addition of the game value from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the game control timer interrupt processing), the game value is added.
It has a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The storage means can store the given information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
After the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the granting means adds the game value according to the granting information stored in the storage means (the power is turned off while the game medium is being paid out). If it occurs, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the payout that was interrupted after the power is turned on is restarted, and the unpaid number of game media is paid out),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to store the given information regarding the game value to be given after the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and it is stored after the power supply to the game machine is restarted. Since it is possible to add the game value corresponding to the given information, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G6.
It can be connected to a game device (card unit 21TM050) and can be connected.
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) adds the game value based on the signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the game device.
When the open state is detected, the addition of the game value based on the signal output from the game device is restricted (the game machine frame door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the game machine. When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not done),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the granting of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open is restricted, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the granting operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is open. It is possible to smoothly proceed with maintenance work while the gaming machine frame or door frame is open.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means G1 to means G7.
A game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing the setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM3540 to step S21TM3580) capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed is provided.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized.
The gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized due to the control to the setting confirmation mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, and in step S21TM3040. If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. When the setting confirmation mode is executed. In the case of step S21TM3150, the clear switch 21TM052 is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040, so that the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or step S21TM3140 is determined to be NO. Does not migrate to),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
Means G8 gaming machine
It is provided with a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (data of the unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The given information is initialized as the game state of the game machine is initialized (the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. Along with this, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. Therefore, the unpaid amount storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not paid out. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the granting information regarding the gaming value to be imparted, so that the management in the gaming store can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
Means G8 gaming machine
It is provided with a storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) that can store the given information (data of the unpaid number) regarding the game value to be given.
The given information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the game state of the game machine is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. However, since the RAM clear in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed. Data is not initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even if the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the grant information is not initialized, so that the information regarding the gaming value to be granted can be appropriately protected.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the processing related to the change of the set value are determined on the external device side. Although it may be necessary to distinguish and recognize both, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both can be recognized on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize them. The inventions according to the means H1 to H5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the processing related to the change of the set value are divided on the external device side. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of means H1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that occurs in the gaming machine, and processing related to changing the set value (setting change). It is possible to output a specific signal according to the mode),
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event and the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value are different (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode by executing RAM clear). If, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
Means H1 gaming machine
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when it is controlled to the setting change mode). It is output for a period in which 30 seconds are added to the specified period, and when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period in which 50 ms is added to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of means H1 or means H2,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" is displayed. The warning "The operation of the setting selector switch was detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible for a clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H3.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the processing related to the setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means H1 to means H4.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the processing related to the setting value change (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. The inventions according to the means I1 to I6 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution status of processing related to a set value on the external device side. ..

The gaming machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
The setting value can be changed,
The output of a specific signal (security signal) is started in response to the start of control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value.
The output of a specific signal (security signal) is stopped in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when controlled in the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means I2 is
It is a gaming machine of means I1 and
It is possible to output a specific signal (security signal) in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) that occurs in the game machine.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (RAM clear is executed for the security signal). If it is not controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for 30 seconds, and if RAM clear is executed and it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of a predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means I3
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The output period of the specific signal differs depending on whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode when it is controlled to the setting change mode). It is output for a period in which 30 seconds are added to the specified period, and when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period in which 50 ms is added to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means I4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I3.
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
It is provided with a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed.
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (the operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on).
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control CPU 120). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" is displayed. The warning "The operation of the setting selector switch was detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible for a clerk of the amusement park or the like to know that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means I5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I4.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the control related to the set value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the 10th terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of a predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means I1 to means I5.
It is possible to output a special signal (setting change compatible signal) corresponding to the control related to the set value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode).
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the super reach type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the icon pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of suggestion effect determination processing during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table, the accessory effect effect determination table, and the light guide plate effect determination table during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end effect processing (step S175). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production stage determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode at the time of changing the effect stage after the end of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect mode at the time of changing the effect stage after the end of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect. The production mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. The production mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern setting process in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table after a small hit. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) shows the information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows the information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It is a figure. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control board to the payout control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command sent and received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line which is used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of a normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a CPU for payout control executes. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which the CPU for payout control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example that the ball lending is not restricted in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which restarts the payout after the setting change mode ends. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of forcibly terminating the payout with the transition to the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer at the time of a normal operation. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period controlled in the setting change mode. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission and reception of the signal between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer in the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is a figure which shows the warning screen when the setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the set value and the output mode of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output mode and output period of the setting change correspondence signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) a diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. .. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restricting the ball lending based on the open state detection of the frame for a game machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming the ball lending after the opening state detection of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming ball lending without shifting to a setting change mode after a power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating ball lending. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode and restarting the ball lending after the power is turned off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of limiting the prize ball payout based on the open state detection of the frame for a game machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of resuming the prize ball payout after the opening state detection of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting the prize ball payout without shifting to a setting change mode after a power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating the prize ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and restarting the prize ball payout. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of hold display and active display. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect determination process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a first change effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for determining a second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold change pattern in the 2nd change production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each effect in the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect mode concerning the 1st change effect and the 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the type of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example about the production mode of the change suggestion effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode, and the display result is "loss". The variation pattern of reach loss is PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and the display result is "big hit". PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In addition, although FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively fueled, and the effect of the effect is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (Semi-cursive, regular script, etc.) of the title characters may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature section 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” stop, and the reach mode is established. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 is as shown in FIG. 9 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the enemy character character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 5.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (F). Then, the characters "SP reach B") are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is notified. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, the titles of Super Reach A (Fig. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is notified, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made to have a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to identify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 8. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to be completely in agreement with the degree of jackpot reliability of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 9 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9 (D), (F), (FIGS. 9), (F), and (2). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach having high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped to notify the title.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, and the display areas for performing title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9H and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9H or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. The title display end timing may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 10 (D). A fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative pattern that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified even during the reach production, the notification of the title is terminated before the determined production is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined production, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to execute the variable display. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 5 displays the hold display, the active display, the character that is residently displayed during the variable display, and the display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of the super reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to draw attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 11 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display the black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that suggests the expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12 (D) and 12 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has been completed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be raised by two or more steps. Also, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same image of the black star is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, the effect based on the command is executed in a different effect mode. In each effect mode, the background, characters, motifs, sounds output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the effect operation of the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and 12 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 12 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13 (B). The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super reach C is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK030 changes to red is executed. In this way, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the superreach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of the change in the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of change timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined as one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode of the character's lines (for example, the display color of the lines) in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “missing”. As shown in FIG. 16C, the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. If the display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the timing of each change between the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is completed.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title and the dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or may be different from the title notice. The ratio of the dialogue notice and which production mode changes (the ratio of acting on which) may be different, or the ratio of changing to what color (how many stages) may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 5, a sub-liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 5, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different in the image display device 5 is executed, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Eliminate enemies with a stick controller", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a deciding effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is displayed according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to 17 (F) and 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before the predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect is improved and the player's expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, display of operation effect image, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, after the reach, the production of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach production is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the reliability of the jackpot when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red letters). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 notifies the speaker 8 to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 9 emits the light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen and the character is displayed in the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19E is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a friendly character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle win!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of feature section 121IW)
Next, the feature unit 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a game machine frame (underframe) 121IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 121IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 121IW003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a, and when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 121IW003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 121IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 121IW201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, the setting key 121IW051 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described later, and the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 121IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is housed in the board case 121IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 121IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 121IW201.

Since the board case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 121IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 121IW051. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature portion 121IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 121IW201, a display monitor 121IW029 and a display changeover switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 121IW201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 121IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in the feature unit 121IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A that covers the right side of the board case 121IW201 from the back side is attached. The curity cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 121IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. Further, the security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 121IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 121IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from the long piece 121IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 121IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 121IW, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 121IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 unless the pachinko / pachislot machine clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 121IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by allowing an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate to enter between the gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machines 1 and the pachinko gaming machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the set value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 121IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 121IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered by the security cover 121IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 121IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 121IW201 can be seen through, the state of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 121IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. 20. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown). Includes (not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20-6, a normal figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 121IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 increasing the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise. In this feature unit 121IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You will win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" and "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The probability of winning a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 121IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to 20-4 (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment can be made depending on whether the first special symbol is a variable display or the second special symbol is a variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit may be determined using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in Fig. 20-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (the number of times the probability change ends) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

The feature unit 121IW provides a total of three set values, 1 to 3, as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature unit 121IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. In order to simplify the above, the percentage of the assigned judgment values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 121IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the feature portion 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the start of the jackpot game state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect effect to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the post-opening process of the jackpot in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 12 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 121IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 121IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot types A <B <C. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 121IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 121IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or when the special figure game is entered into the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and the probability variation control is different for each jackpot type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 121IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability variation control, the number of controls, etc.) between the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, and the fanfare period and interval. The average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, but for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each jackpot type, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 121IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Included in determining by percentage.

Further, in this feature unit 121IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured so that the period is different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in the feature unit 121IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 121IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 121IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the big hit type. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In the middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be set in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch) is passed through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to the probability change state or the jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), the feature unit 121IW is provided with small hit types A to C as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in the feature unit 121IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the opening period and the number of times of opening the large winning opening during the small hit game are the same regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". A small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and a loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 121IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and other periods (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 121IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6, normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, since the execution rate of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), and further, a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given and the game entertainment can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, depending on the set value, at times other than non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". The ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 121IW, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. This is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that only normal reach loss has different execution ratios depending on the set value.

The feature unit 121IW displays a common background image in the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and 20-6 (B) is used. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 5 displays a common background image and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. The dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 121IW, and for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different from the usual one and the set value 1 or 2 (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 121IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine the crab.

As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 121IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of the jackpot increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the sway display of the decorative pattern and the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to produce the effect. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative symbol (final) The period during which the stop symbol) is displayed as a stop may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the fluctuation time may be longer when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set higher.

The feature portion 121IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time, which is shorter than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. Then, this variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Therefore, in the feature unit 121IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the variation time for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 121IW will be described. 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 121IW. In the feature unit 121IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 121IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 121IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004 and the processes of steps 121IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 121IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 clears, for example, a factory-factory setting flag indicating that the RAM 102 is still set at the factory-shipped (for example, this flag is cleared even if the RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and the recovery processing described later are executed. (Cleared when the setting change process described later is executed) is set so that it is not set, and in step 121IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not this factory default setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the factory default value is set (for example, "0" or "-") is set as the set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 121IWS006. May be checked to see if is still at the factory default. If the factory default settings are used (step 121 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 121IWS006; Yes), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 121IWS007). Specifically, in step 121IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 121IWS008). In step 121 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121 IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 121IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 121IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, the display of "E").

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 121IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is off (N in step 121IWS011), when the setting key 121IW051 is off (N in step 121IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 121IWS012). In step 121IWS013 N), the process does not shift to step 121IWS014, but shifts to loop processing.

When the processes of steps 121IWS006 to S014 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 121IW (N in steps 121IWS007 and S008), or the factory default settings remain (step 121IWS007, S008). In the case of 121IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 121IWS009), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 open. The RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting value can be changed after step 121 IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS017). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation process start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the effect control board 12 may be configured to display "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of the set value). When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121 IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS016) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. (Step 121 IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 121IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 121IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value among the storage areas of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the ratio and the combination ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change processing start command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 121IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS031). Further, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (N in step 121IWS025) or when the setting key 121IW051 is not on (N in step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. Therefore, an effect control command instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS034.

In the feature unit 121IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (A) is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSA02). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02, and the processes of steps 121IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation error processing (step 121IWSA04). Then, after that, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that a setting confirmation error occurs, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process ends.

Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (B) is a flowchart showing a setting change process (step 121IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is on (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is not on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is ON (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "2", and "2" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 121IW029. The display of the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated to "3", and when "3" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 121IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 121IW051 is on (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02, and the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes the setting change error processing (step 121IWSB07). Then, after that, the process shifts to loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting change error, and execute the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the process shifts to the loop processing, and then the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting changing flag is still set in step 121IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y and 121IWS014 in step 121IWS009). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on, the process of step 121IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 121IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS015-S017) is executed. If the setting key 121IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Will be executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when the store clerk of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 121IW029 based on the setting key 121IW051 being turned off by the operation of a store clerk or the like of the game hall, thereby causing the game hall to blink. Notifies the store clerk of the above that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory about the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 121IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 121IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of the feature unit 121IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the case where the set value is displayed by using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is shown. The set value may be displayed by using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029, for example. Further, for example, the display monitor 121IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays four digits of "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays "-S-2". The 4-digit display of "-S-3" may be performed on the display monitor 121IW029 if the set value is "3". Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays the four digits of "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays the four digits of "2222". You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature unit 121IW will be described. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 121IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 121IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 121 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 121IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 121IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 121IWS107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121 IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the process of step 121IWS031, but even after the power is turned on, the step The set value command is transmitted every time the variation display is started by executing the process of 121IWS108.

Even if the same fluctuation pattern is used, if different fluctuation pattern commands are sent for each set value, the total number of fluctuation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) of fluctuation pattern commands are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, even if the set value command is transmitted only when a specific fluctuation pattern is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is provided with the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the set value. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of the set value. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 121IWS031) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 121IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, even if the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting fluctuation are configured as separate commands, different setting value commands are sent at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the setting value is "1", and when the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side is configured to output which set value. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by the ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current gaming state (step 121IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 controls to send a probabilistic state background specification command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background specification command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see Fig. 20-4) with the random number value MR1, and if they match, decides to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 121IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 121IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 121IWS112), and proceeds to step 121IWS116.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 121IWS111), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 121IWS116 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 121 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 121IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 121IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the feature unit 121IW. In the feature unit 121IW, in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process (step 121IWS201) to change the effect mode when the effect control random number update process of step S77 is executed, and then the effect mode is changed (step 121IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

The feature unit 121IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 121 IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the date and time information from the real-time clock and the predetermined date and time. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 121IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

20-16 to 20-18 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121 IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 121IWS303). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 121IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 121IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 121 IWS306).

In the feature unit 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. To. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

Further, in this feature unit 121IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normally performed due to missing command or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 121 IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 121IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 121IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the setting value command is read out on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Then, even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 121IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
When the effect control board 12 side receives any of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command from the main board 11 in the command analysis process, the feature unit 121IW receives. , The image display device 5 controls to display a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter, also referred to as initial roll production).

If the received effect control command is a setting change process end command (step 121IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is received normally), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to use a combination of even initial rolls (for example, "246" and "224"), which is a combination of even decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative symbols. It is determined to be one of an odd initial roll (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial roll which is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 121IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS314.

FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 121 IWS309, using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, and the initial result is performed. Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd-numbered initial rolls are displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even-numbered initial rolls are displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the set value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121 IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (step 121 IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS314.

By executing the process of steps 121IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining the odd initial roll is the lowest, and the special initial roll is not determined. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS314.

FIG. 20-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value "3" which is the most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS312 to S313, the feature unit 121IW sets a disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, the odd initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial rolls determined in steps 121IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 121IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 5 In, the control to display the even initial result is performed (step 121IWS315).

By executing the process of step 121IWS315, the feature unit 121IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial number symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, an initial roll is used by using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A). It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial number is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set, and the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of "???" symbols as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when N is determined in step 121IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is any of the initialization specification command, the recovery command, and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121IWS316), that is, if the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , The initial roll is determined, and the image display device 5 controls to display the even initial roll (step 121IWS317). In the feature unit 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial roll is determined as the even initial roll and is not determined as the odd initial roll, but the even initial roll is determined by lottery. It may be determined as either an eye or an odd initial result. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

If the received effect control command is a RAM error notification command (step 121IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 121IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "a RAM error error has occurred" in the image display device 5, or outputs a sound or an error sound indicating a RAM error error from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). Is white and emits light).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for specifying the variation pattern) (step 121IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the RAM. Store in the area (step 121IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (effect control command that specifies whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, a big hit type, or a small hit type) (step 121IWS323), for effect control. The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation command (effect control command that specifies that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 121IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step 121IWS325). Step 121 IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 121IWS328).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 121IWS330).

Specify whether or not the received effect control command is a big hit determined in advance by the symbol specification command (starting prize judgment process (see step S101), whether or not it is a small hit, and the judgment result of the big hit type and the small hit type. If it is (step 121 IWS331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received symbol designation command in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121 IWS331). Step 121 IWS332).

If the received effect control command is a variation category command (an effect control command that specifies the determination result of the variation category (variation pattern type or variation pattern) pre-read by the start winning determination process (see step S101)) (step 121 IWS333). ), The effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable category command in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step). 121IWS334).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number addition designation command (step 121IWS335), the effect control CPU 120 sends the received first hold storage number addition designation command to the start winning command formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored in each storage area of the storage area (step 121IWS336). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS337). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS338).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number addition designation command (step 121IWS339), the effect control CPU 120 inputs the received second hold storage number addition designation command to the start winning command formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol specification command and variable category command are stored in each storage area of the storage area (step 121 IWS340). Further, the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5 and updates the second hold storage number display (step 121IWS341). Further, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS342).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS343), the effect control CPU 120 erases one hold display in the first hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one to update the first hold storage number display (step 121IWS344). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS345).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS346), the effect control CPU 120 erases one hold display in the second hold storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining The hold display is shifted one by one to update the second hold storage number display (step 121IWS347). Further, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (step 121IWS348).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 121IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS301.

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. Good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial roll and the even initial roll, the initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so that the value is displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, it is confirmed that the set value is 3 when the specific initial roll is displayed. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the determined ratio may be different depending on the set value.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 121IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial roll effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The suggestion effect during the game executed during the change display of the decorative pattern), the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern, and the suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effects and initial roll effects suggesting that the settings have been changed), or the execution ratio It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be changed.

(Read-ahead notice setting process)
In addition to the initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, and jackpot suggestion effect, the feature section 121IW can suggest set values such as look-ahead zone effect, reach-in-game suggestion effect, and production stage. It is possible to execute the effect by changing.

FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the read-ahead notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has been received (step 121 IWS401). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition designation command or second hold storage number addition designation command) are displayed in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If a new command at the time of one set of start winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a new start winning to the first starting winning opening has occurred (step 121 IWS402). .. It should be noted that whether or not the start winning prize is generated in the first starting winning opening is specifically whether or not the newly received hold storage number addition designation command is the first hold storage number addition designation command. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not. Unless the start winning prize is generated in the first starting winning opening (that is, when the starting winning prize is generated in the second starting winning opening), the process is terminated as it is.

When a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more (step 121IWS403). If the number of first reserved storage is not 2 or more (that is, if the number of first reserved storage is 1), the process ends as it is.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps IWS402 and S403, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed only when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed two or more times. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, or the look-ahead zone effect is executed even when only one variable display is executed after the start winning. It may be configured as possible.

If the number of first reserved storage is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the read-ahead zone effect executing flag indicating that the read-ahead zone effect is being executed is set (step 121 IWS404). If the look-ahead zone effect executing flag is set (that is, if the look-ahead zone effect is already being executed), the process ends as it is. By executing the process of step 121 IWS404, in this example, when the look-ahead zone effect is already being executed, the look-ahead zone effect is not determined in duplicate.

If the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is not set (that is, the pre-reading zone effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 is the first of the symbol specification commands stored in the start winning command storage area. All the symbol designation commands (all symbol designation commands stored in association with the first hold storage number addition designation command) based on the winning of the start winning opening are extracted (step 121IWS405).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the extracted symbol designation commands indicates that the pre-reading determination result is a big hit (step 121 IWS406). If there is a big hit (that is, if there is a big hit in the first hold memory), the effect control CPU 120 uses the look-ahead zone for the big hit as a table for determining the presence / absence of the look-ahead zone effect. Select the effect determination table (step 121 IWS407). If there is no big hit (that is, if there is no big hit in the first hold memory), the effect control CPU 120 uses the look-ahead zone as a table for determining the presence / absence of the look-ahead zone effect. Select the effect determination table (step 121IWS408). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected look-ahead zone effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect (step 121IWS409).

FIG. 20-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-21 (A) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table for big hits. Further, FIG. 20-21 (B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table for removal. As shown in FIG. 20-21, in this example, if there is a big hit in the first hold memory, it is decided to execute the look-ahead zone effect with a probability of 70%, and the first hold memory If there is no big hit in it, it is decided to execute the look-ahead zone effect with a probability of 1%.

In this example, the case where the execution rate of the look-ahead zone effect is different depending on whether or not it is a big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect may be different depending on the presence or absence and type of super reach. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect may be different depending on the presence or absence of the pseudo-ream and the number of pseudo-reams.

When it is determined to execute the look-ahead zone effect (Y in step 121IWS410), the effect control CPU 120 sets the read-ahead zone effect executing flag (step 121IWS411). Further, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter for counting the number of executions of the look-ahead zone effect to 0 (step 121 IWS412). The look-ahead zone effect executing flag set in step 121IWS411 is reset when a big hit occurs, and the look-ahead zone effect ends. Further, in this example, when the big hit does not occur even if the fluctuation display is executed four times (when the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter becomes 4), the fluctuation display is terminated. It is assumed that the pre-reading zone effect executing flag is reset and the pre-reading zone effect is terminated.

By executing the above processing, the feature unit 121IW may decide to execute the look-ahead zone effect when a new start winning prize is generated. Then, when the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is decided, the look-ahead zone effect is started when the first variable display is started, and when a big hit occurs in the second to fourth variable display, the set value " It is suggested that it is "1" to "3".

In this example, the presence / absence of the look-ahead zone effect is determined based on the look-ahead determination result indicated by the symbol designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead determination result (for example, whether or not the super reach is achieved) indicated by the variable category command.

Further, in this example, when the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is decided, the case where the look-ahead zone effect is started when the first variable display is uniformly started is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, a plurality of timings may be provided as the start timing of the look-ahead zone effect. In this case, for example, when the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is determined in the look-ahead advance notice setting process, the start timing of the look-ahead zone effect is set to the first variation, the second variation, or the third variation. It may be determined and configured to start the look-ahead zone effect from the determined start timing.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 121IWS502, step 121IWS503). Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is reset (step 121IWS504), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 121IWS505), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 121IWS506). (Step 121 IWS507). In step 121 IWS507, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when the variable display is not executed and the predetermined period elapses (and the jackpot game state is not controlled), or when the game is not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means matches a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 121IWS508). That is, in step 121IWS508, it is confirmed whether or not the game has been started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121 IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 121IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS515.

In the feature unit 121IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 20-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 121 IWS510, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area. Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-23 (A), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of pre-game suggestion effects executed increases in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" in which the second effect mode is determined increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous set value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the set value is "3".

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the set value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121 IWS511). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A). And the production mode is determined (step 121IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS515.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS511 to S512, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS515.

FIG. 20-23 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS513 to S514, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 121IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 121IWS510, S512, and S514 (step 121IWS515). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 121 IWS516 as it is. That is, in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 121IWS513, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. It is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being less interested in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

The feature unit 121IW is configured so that the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed when the setting value is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not yet been received. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 20-23 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect in the mode including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 121IWS516). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 121 IWS516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 121IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer-waiting demo effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. The information may be stored, and the effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the setting value may be executed. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 121IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 121IWS508 to 121IWS515. Further, the process of step 121IWS516 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game and to give a motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and it is possible to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 121IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game or the like. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the set value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

(Variable display start setting process)
20-24 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 121 IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 121IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 121IWS602 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 121 IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. Further, for example, when the received display result specification command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. To do.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. .. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 121IWS602. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time includes super reach (step 121IWS603). Specifically, whether or not the variation display includes super reach can be determined by checking the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601. In the case of variable display including super reach, the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the super reach type determination table for determining the type of super reach, and develops during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The type of super reach to be caused is determined (step 121 IWS 604).

FIG. 20-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the super reach type determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-25 (A) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “1”. Further, FIG. 20-25 (B) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “2”. Further, FIG. 20-25 (C) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is “3”.

In this example, when super reach is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is possible to develop into four types of super reach, super reach A to D. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (A), when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining that Super Reach B is executed is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (B), when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining that the super reach C is executed is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-25 (C), when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining that the super reach D is executed is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the icon pattern to be displayed during the super reach according to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 (step 121IWS605). In step 121 IWS605, the effect control CPU 120 selects an icon pattern determination table for determining an icon pattern according to a set value, and uses the selected icon pattern determination table to perform a lottery process based on a random number to perform an icon pattern. To determine.

20-26 and 20-27 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the icon pattern determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-26 (A) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “1”. Further, FIG. 20-26 (B) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “2”. Further, FIG. 20-27 (C) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is “3”.

In this example, when the start timing of the super reach is reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the panel images A to D corresponding to each of the super reach A to D are overlapped with the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A at the top. Is displayed. Then, according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the panel images corresponding to the super reach A are erased in order, and finally the super reach of the type corresponding to the panel image displayed at the top is developed. Is executed.

In this example, when it is determined to execute Super Reach A, the panel image is not deleted even if the push button 31B is operated, and the panel image corresponding to Super Reach A is displayed at the top. It does not change as it is. Further, when it is decided to execute Super Reach B, when the panel image corresponding to Super Reach B is displayed at the beginning, the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is further operated. However, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach B remains displayed at the beginning and does not change. Further, when it is decided to execute Super Reach C, when the panel image corresponding to Super Reach C is displayed at the beginning, the panel image is deleted even if the push button 31B is further operated. However, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach C remains displayed at the beginning and does not change.

Further, in this example, the icon image may be displayed on the panel images B to D corresponding to each of the super reach B to D, and finally depending on the icon image displayed on the panel image displayed at the beginning. By suggesting the current set value, the suggestion effect during reach is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 20-27, in this example, there are nine types of icon patterns 1 to 9. The icon pattern 1 is a pattern in which the icon image is not displayed in any of the panel images B to D. Therefore, the decision to use the icon pattern 1 means that the suggestion effect during reach is not executed. Further, the icon pattern 2 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D. Further, the icon pattern 3 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image D. Further, the icon pattern 4 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images C to D. Further, the icon pattern 5 is a pattern in which the icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B, the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C, and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. Further, the icon pattern 6 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on any of the panel images B to D. Further, the icon pattern 7 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel images B to C and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D. Further, the icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image B and the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel images C to D. Further, the icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which the icon image “★” is displayed in any of the panel images B to D.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A), when the set value is "1", the selection ratios of the icon patterns 2 to 5 in which the icon image "●" is displayed on the panel image B are compared. Highly targeted (60% chance of being selected in the case of a big hit, 50% chance of being selected in the case of a miss). Therefore, in this example, since the execution rate of Super Reach B is high when the set value is "1", if the icon image "●" is finally displayed on the panel B displayed at the top. , The probability that the set value is "1" is high, and the set value "1" is suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (B), when the set value is “2”, the selection ratio of the icon patterns 4 to 7 in which the icon image “▲” is displayed on the panel image C. Is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a miss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, since the execution rate of Super Reach C is high when the set value is "2", if the icon image "▲" is finally displayed on the panel C displayed at the top. , The probability that the set value is "2" is high, and the set value "2" is suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), when the set value is “3”, the icon image “★” is displayed on the panel image D of the icon patterns 5, 7 to 9. The selection rate is relatively high (in the case of a big hit, it is selected with a total probability of 60%, and in the case of a miss, it is selected with a total probability of 50%). Therefore, in this example, since the execution rate of Super Reach D is high when the set value is "3", if the icon image "★" is finally displayed on the panel D displayed at the top. , The probability that the set value is "3" is high, and the set value "3" is suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), when the icon pattern 2 is selected when the set value is "1", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for a big hit with respect to the combination of a specific set value and the icon pattern (in this example, the combination of the set value "1" and the icon pattern 2). Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, when the set value is "1", the icon pattern 2 may be selected at a low rate even if the setting value is "1". You may.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A) and 20-26 (B), when the set values are "1" and "2", the ratio of selecting the icon pattern 9 is extremely high at 1%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-27 (C), when the set value is "3", the ratio of selecting the icon pattern 9 is relatively high (30% probability in the case of a big hit). It is selected with, and if it is out of order, it is selected with a 20% probability). Therefore, in this example, when the icon image “★” is displayed in all of the panel images B to D in the super reach, the expectation that the set value is “3” is high. Therefore, with respect to the combination of a specific set value and the icon pattern (in this example, the combination of the set value "3" and the icon pattern 9), it is possible to increase the expectation for the set value having a high degree of advantage. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, when the icon pattern 9 is selected, it may be configured so as to confirm that the setting value is “3”.

In this example, as an example in which the degree of expectation for the set value differs depending on the combination of a specific set value and the icon pattern, the set value "3" is obtained for the combination of the set value "3" and the icon pattern 9. Although the case where the degree of expectation for the above is high is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a combination of the setting value "1" and the icon pattern, which has a high expectation for the setting value "1", may be provided, or a combination of the setting value "2" and the icon pattern, which has a high expectation for the setting value "2". May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the icon image is displayed in the super reach and the suggestion effect during the reach is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect during reach in the full rotation reach in which all three decorative symbols are rotated with all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right aligned with the same symbol. Further, in this case, for example, the combination of a specific set value and the full rotation reach may be configured so as to increase the expectation for the set value having a high degree of advantage.

Further, the type of the icon pattern is not limited to the icon patterns 1 to 9 shown in this example. For example, in this example, as in the icon patterns 2 to 9, the case where the icon image is displayed in all three panel images B to D other than the panel image A is shown, but the panel images B to D are not necessarily displayed. It is not necessary to display the icon image in all of them, and the icon pattern may be configured so that the icon image is displayed only in any one or two panel images of the panel images B to D.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS606).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the look-ahead zone effect executing flag is set (step 121IWS607). If the look-ahead zone effect executing flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is the variation display of the first special symbol (step 121IWS608). Whether or not to start the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the first symbol variation specification command (designating to start the variation display of the first special symbol) transmitted at the start of the variation display. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the effect control command) has been received. When starting the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter (step 121 IWS609).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter after addition is 1 (step 121 IWS610). If the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter is 1 (that is, when executing the first variable look-ahead zone effect), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial effect pattern as the look-ahead zone effect pattern (step). 121IWS611). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS616.

If the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is a big hit (step 121 IWS612). Whether or not the display is a variable display that is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. If it is a variable display that is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a jackpot look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table according to the value of the look-ahead zone effect number counter as a table for determining the look-ahead zone effect pattern (step). 121IWS613). Further, if it is not a variable display that is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for deviation according to the value of the look-ahead zone effect number counter as a table for determining the look-ahead zone effect pattern. (Step 121 IWS614). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses the selected look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the look-ahead zone effect pattern (step 121IWS615).

FIG. 20-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-28 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the second variation is executed). ing. Further, FIG. 20-28 (B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for outliers when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when the read-ahead zone effect of the second variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (C) shows a specific example of the jackpot look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when the read-ahead zone effect of the third variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (D) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for outliers when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when the read-ahead zone effect of the third variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (E) shows a specific example of the jackpot look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when the read-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). There is. Further, FIG. 20-28 (F) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for outliers when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when the read-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). There is.

As shown in FIGS. 20-28, in this example, there are three types of look-ahead zone effect patterns 1 to 3. As the look-ahead zone effect pattern. The look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is a pattern that suggests that the set value is "1" if a big hit is obtained in the variable display this time. Further, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is a pattern suggesting that the set value is "2" if a big hit is obtained in the current variation display. Further, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is a pattern suggesting that the set value is "3" if a big hit is obtained in the current variation display.

As shown in FIGS. 20-28, in this example, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when executing the look-ahead zone effect of the second variation), the set value is “1” and a big hit is obtained. The look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is selected at a high rate of 80%. Further, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when executing the look-ahead zone effect of the third variation), the set value is "2" and the read-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is 80% higher when it becomes a big hit. Select by percentage. Further, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when executing the look-ahead zone effect of the 4th variation), the set value is "3" and the read-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is 80% higher when it becomes a big hit. Select by percentage. Therefore, in this example, when the set value "1" is suggested in the second variation look-ahead zone effect and a big hit is obtained, the accuracy of the set value "1" is high, and the setting value is set in the third variation look-ahead zone effect. When the value "2" is suggested and a big hit is made, the accuracy of the set value "2" is high, and when the set value "3" is suggested in the pre-reading zone effect of the 4th variation and the big hit is made It is configured so that the accuracy of the set value "3" is high.

The configuration of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to use a different look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table or to make the distribution of judgment values different depending on whether or not the variable display this time is a variable display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead zone effect. You may do it. In this case, for example, when the current variation display is the variation display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead zone effect, if the current variation display is off, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 suggesting the set value "3" is high. It may be configured so that a pattern suggesting a setting can be easily selected.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the variation pattern, the look-ahead zone effect, the in-reach suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect, and if it is determined, the look-ahead zone effect (for example, the look-ahead zone effect pattern) or reach. A process table corresponding to the suggestion effect during the game (for example, the icon pattern) and the suggestion effect during the game is selected (step 121IWS616). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 121 IWS617).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 121IWS618).

In the feature unit 121IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 121IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes one start winning command (symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command) stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area. The contents of the command storage area at the time of starting winning are shifted (step 121IWS620).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 121IWS621), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 20-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process (step 121IWS606) during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 121IWS701), it selects the first in-game suggestion effect determination table (step 121IWS702) and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 121IWS701), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 121IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, a special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 121IWS701 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 121IWS705).

FIG. 20-30 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-30 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30, the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second production mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first production mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values is larger than that. That is, there is a high degree of reliability that the second effect mode is set to a set value that is more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), the in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the set value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121 IWS706). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 121 IWS707).

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS706 to S707, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of determining that the suggestion effect is executed during the game is low, and the ratio determined as the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest and may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS709).

FIG. 20-30 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-30 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value "3". , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS708 to S709, a disadvantageous set value is set in the feature unit 121IW when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player on the contrary is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is not executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 121IWS708, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be enabled to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and 20-30 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1, is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 121IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect during the game at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 121IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during the game in a different mode. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 121IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. Or, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game. It may be set to be high, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of the suggestion effect being executed during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Variable display during production processing)
20-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 121IWS801) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 121IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 121IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS804). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 121IWS805).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach is being executed (step 121 IWS806). Whether or not the super reach is being executed can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121 IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the super reach is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the push button 31B has been input (step 121IWS807). If the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (that is, if the push button 31B is in the ON state), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of operations (the number of repeated hits) of the push button 31B. The value of the operation count counter is added by 1 (step 121IWS808).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach A (step 121IWS809). If it is determined to be Super Reach A, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818 as it is. Unless it is determined to be Super Reach A (that is, if it is determined to be Super Reach B to D), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation count counter is 1. Step 121 IWS810). If the value of the operation count counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image A if the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A is displayed on the image display device 5 ( Step 121 IWS811).

Step 121 When the processing of IWS809 to S811 is executed and the super reach B to D is determined, the display is started in the state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and then the push is performed. The panel image A is erased based on the fact that the button 31B is operated once.

If the value of the operation count counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach B (step 121IWS812). If it is determined to be Super Reach B, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818 as it is. Unless it is determined to be super reach B (that is, if it is determined to be super reach C to D), the value of the operation count counter becomes the first predetermined number (for example, 10) in the effect control CPU 120. (Step 121 IWS813). If the value of the operation count counter is the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image B if the panel image B corresponding to the super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121 IWS814).

When the super reach C to D is determined by executing the process of steps 121IWS812 to S814, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel image A is displayed. Is erased, the panel image B is further erased based on the fact that the push button 31B is repeatedly hit by the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times).

If the value of the operation count counter is not the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach C (step 121IWS815). If it is determined to be Super Reach C, the process proceeds to step 121IWS818 as it is. Unless it is determined to be super reach C (that is, if it is determined to be super reach D), does the effect control CPU 120 have a second predetermined number (for example, 20) of the operation count counter value? Confirm whether or not (step 121 IWS816). If the value of the operation count counter is the second predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image C if the panel image C corresponding to the super reach C is displayed on the image display device 5. (Step 121 IWS817).

When the process of steps 121IWS815 to S817 is executed and the super reach D is determined, the display is started in a state where the panel images A to D are overlapped on the image display device 5, and the panel images A and the panel are displayed. After the image B is erased, the panel image C is erased based on the fact that the push button 31B is further pressed a second predetermined number (for example, 20 times).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the operation valid period during the super reach has expired (step 121 IWS818). Whether or not the operation valid period has expired can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121 IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the operation valid period has not expired, the process proceeds to step 121IWS826 as it is. If the operation valid period has expired, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation count counter is 1 or more (step 121IWS819). If the value of the operation counter is not 1 or more (that is, if the value of the operation counter is 0 (that is, if the push button 31B is not operated even once within the operation valid period during super reach)), it is as it is. Step 121 Transition to IWS824.

If the value of the operation count counter is 1 or more (that is, if the push button 31B is operated at least once within the operation valid period during super reach), the effect control CPU 120 is super as a type of super reach. It is confirmed whether or not the case is determined to be reach C (step 121IWS820). If it is determined to be Super Reach C, the effect control CPU 120 controls to forcibly erase the panel image B if the panel image B is still displayed on the image display device 5 (step 121IWS821). It should be noted that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that the panel image A should have been erased at least at this stage.

Unless it is determined to be Super Reach C, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to be Super Reach D as the type of Super Reach (step 121IWS822). If it is determined to be Super Reach D, the effect control CPU 120 forcibly erases the panel image B and the panel image C if the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed on the image display device 5. Control is performed (step 121IWS823). It should be noted that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so that the panel image A should have been erased at least at this stage.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be Super Reach D (that is, if it is determined to be Super Reach A or Super Reach B), the process proceeds to step 121IWS824 as it is.

By executing the processes of steps 121 IWS819 to S823, in this example, when the super reach C or the super reach D is determined, the player operates the push buttons 31B up to the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number. If the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed, the panel image C and the panel image D are forcibly displayed at the top. For example, if it is determined to be super reach C, the panel image C is forcibly displayed at the top, and if it is determined to be super reach D, the panel image D is forcibly displayed. It is considered to be the state displayed at the beginning. On the other hand, when the super reach B to D are determined and the player does not operate the push button 31B even once (in this case, the panel image A is still displayed at the top). ), The panel image A remains displayed at the beginning and is not changed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process table according to the super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed at the head of the image display device 5 (step 121 IWS824). For example, when the panel image A is displayed at the beginning, the process data is switched to the process data according to the super reach A, and when the panel image B is displayed at the beginning, the process data is switched to the process data according to the super reach B. When the panel image C is displayed at the head, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach C, and when the panel image D is displayed at the head, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 121 IWS825).

After that, according to the process data switched in step 121IWS824, the processing of step 121IWS805 is executed at the timing of the timer interrupt from the next time onward, so that the effect of developing into super reach A to D is executed.

The value of the operation count counter may be configured to be cleared to 0 when, for example, the super reach is ended or the fluctuation display is ended.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 121IWS826), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” (step 121IWS827), and ends the variable display during effect process.

(During big hit production decision processing)
FIG. 20-33 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 121IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS907.

In step S121IWS902, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the third is shown in FIG. 20-34 (A). One jackpot suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in this feature unit 121IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values is high between the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the suggestion effect during the jackpot, which is more reliable than in the non-specific period, is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 121IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 121IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 121IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed according to the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), after the decorative symbol to be a jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, FIG. As shown in 20-36 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 121IW105 is displayed.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the set value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS903). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1" (the effect mode A). Step 121 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS907.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS903 to S904, the feature unit 121IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, the player is disappointed by the big hit suggestion effect being executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous set value is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 121IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS907.

FIG. 20-34 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-34 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode is determined to be lower, and the fourth effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 121IWS905 to S906, the feature unit 121IW sets a disadvantageous set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 121IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 121IWS905, the feature unit 121IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the jackpot when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and 20-34 (B), only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), the rate at which the suggestion effect during the big hit is not executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the rate at which the suggestion effect is not executed differs depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 121IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect) according to the set value. The execution ratios of the effect mode and the fourth effect mode are different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 121IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 121IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B2), the movable member 121IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A1) and 20-35 (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 is affected by the big hit suggestion effect. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 121IW, since the suggestion effect during the jackpot and the accessory effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, the movable member 121IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 121IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player may pay attention to the movable member 121IW101 and overlook the dialogue image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. Therefore, in step 121IWS907, by using the accessory effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-34 (D), the accessory effect is not executed when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the big hit suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 121IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the big hit suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by lowering the execution rate of the character effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 20-34 (D), when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 121IWS909) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 121IWS908).

Here, a light guide plate 121IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the light guide plate 121IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 121IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 121IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 121 IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when it is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 121IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. If this is done, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the big hit suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Small hit end production processing)
20-37 is a flowchart showing the small hit end effect process (step S175) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer (step 121 IWS1001). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the effect period measurement timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 121IWS1002). The effect period measurement timer is set based on confirmation of receipt of the small hit end designation command in, for example, the small hit middle effect process (see step S174).

If the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS1003). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R as production parts) are controlled (step 121IWS1004).

Next, if the process timer has not timed out (N in step 121IWS1005), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step 121IWS1005), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS1006). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer (step 121IWS1007).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect stage determination table according to the small hit type as a table for determining whether or not to change the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and the type of the changed effect stage. (Step 121 IWS1008). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected effect stage determination table, and determines whether or not to change the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and the type of the changed effect stage. (Step 121 IWS1009).

20-38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect stage determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-38 (A) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type A is selected. Further, FIG. 20-38 (B) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type B is used. Further, FIG. 20-38 (C) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type C is used.

As shown in FIGS. 20-38, judgment values are assigned to the production stage determination table for no change in the production stage, change to the production stage A, change to the production stage B, and change to the production stage C. There is. When the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, when the set value is "1", the rate of change to the effect stage A is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "1" when the stage A is changed to the effect stage A after the end of the small hit game. Further, when the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, when the set value is "2", the rate of change to the effect stage B is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "2" when the stage B is changed to the effect stage B after the end of the small hit game. Further, when the effect stage is changed, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the effect stage C may be changed only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "3" when the stage C is changed to the effect stage C after the end of the small hit game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (C), in this example, in the case of the small hit type C, the effect stage A is selected at a high ratio of 50% when the set value is "1". When the set value is "2", the effect stage B is selected at a high rate of 60%, and when the set value is "3", the effect stage C is selected at a high rate of 50%. There is. Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C has the highest reliability. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the ratio of selecting the effect stage A when the set value is "1" is only 30%, and when the set value is "2", the effect stage is selected. The ratio of selecting B is only 40%, and the ratio of selecting the effect stage C when the set value is "3" is only 30%. Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the production stage is not always changed after the end of the small hit game, and it may be determined without changing the production stage, but the set value "1" ~ The ratio determined without changing the production stage differs depending on which of "3" (in other words, the ratio of changing the production stage also differs).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, an effect stage C for determining that the set value is "3" is provided, and a specific effect stage (in this example, an effect) is provided according to the set value. The rate of change to stage C) is different. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, even if the set value is "1" or "2", the effect stage C may be changed at a low rate.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the case where the presence / absence of the change of the production stage and the determination ratio of the type of the production stage after the change are different is shown by the lottery process by the effect control CPU 120. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, when the gaming machine is configured so that the small hit probability differs depending on which of the set values "1" to "3", the small hit probability differs depending on the set value, and as a result, the production stage is changed. It may be configured so that the presence / absence of the presence and the determination ratio of the type of the effect stage after the change are different. Further, for example, the presence / absence of the change of the production stage for each small hit type and the determination ratio of the type of the production stage after the change are configured to be the same, and which of the set values "1" to "3" is used. By determining the small hit type according to different ratios, the presence or absence of the change of the production stage and the determination ratio of the type of the production stage after the change may be different.

When it is decided to change the production stage (Y) in (step 121IWS1010), the production control CPU 120 changes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 into a background image according to the changed production stage. Control to change (step 121 IWS1011).

In the feature unit 121IW, when a small hit occurs and the effect stage is changed, a background image corresponding to the changed effect stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the next small hit occurs. And.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, after changing the production stage and ending the variable display for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the normal production stage is restored and the normal background image is restored. It may be configured. Further, for example, the production stage may be configured to be changeable each time a small hit occurs, or after the production stage is changed once, even if a small hit occurs, the production stage is not changed again. It may be configured.

Further, in this example, when the production stage is changed after the end of the small hit game, a background image corresponding to the changed production stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. I can't be limited. For example, it is not always necessary to execute it over a plurality of variable displays, and an effect suggesting a set value is executed only once after the end of the small hit game (a single effect suggesting a set value is executed). It may be configured.

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “0” (step 121IWS1012), and ends the small hit end effect process.

Next, an example of production in the feature unit 121IW will be described. First, an effect mode in which the effect stage is changed after the small hit game is completed will be described. 20-39 and 20-40 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game. In addition, in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40, it is assumed that the production modes change in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

First, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, it is assumed that the set value is "1". As shown in FIG. 20-39 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is executed, and as shown in FIG. 20-39 (B), the small hit of the small hit type B is executed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "357") is confirmed and displayed, and the small hit game is executed. Then, it is assumed that it is decided to change to the effect stage A suggesting that the set value is "1", and as shown in FIG. 20-39 (C), the image display device 5 corresponds to the effect stage A. It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIGS. 20-39 (C), the background image corresponding to the effect stage A is changed to an image in which a school of fish 121IW106 is swimming in the sea.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, it is assumed that the set value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 20-40 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is executed, and as shown in FIG. 20-40 (B), the small hit of the small hit type C is executed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It is assumed that the symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "579") is confirmed and displayed, and the small hit game is executed. Then, it is assumed that it is decided to change to the effect stage C suggesting that the set value is "3", and as shown in FIG. 20-40 (C), the image display device 5 corresponds to the effect stage C. It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-40 (C), the background image corresponding to the effect stage C is changed to an image in which the rocket 121IW107 flies toward the moon 121IW108 in outer space.

The effect mode shown in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40 is an example. For example, in the case of the small hit type A, the small hit in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-40 (B). The small hit symbol of type A (for example, a combination of symbols of "135") may be fixedly displayed. Further, for example, when the screen is changed to the production stage B, a background image (for example, a flock of birds flies in the air) corresponding to the production stage B in FIGS. 20-39 (C) and 20-40 (C). It should be changed to an image that looks like it is.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, the case of being changed to the effect stage A is shown, but in this example, even when the set value is "1", the effect is changed to the effect stage B at a low rate. (See Figures 20-38). Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, the case of being changed to the effect stage C is shown, but in this example, even when the set value is "3", the effect stage A and the effect stage are at a low rate. May be changed to B (see Figures 20-38).

It should be noted that the effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small hit game is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40. For example, a battle effect is executed at the end of a small hit game, and when a ally character wins the battle, the effect stage is changed and the background image is switched to suggest a set value, and when the ally character loses the battle, the effect stage. May be configured so that is not changed and the background image is not changed. As such, various production modes can be considered.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value is suggested by changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game is shown, but the method of suggesting the set value in relation to the small hit is the one shown in this example. I can't be limited. For example, when the period of the small hit game is secured to some extent, a predetermined character or the like associated with the set value may appear during the small hit game to suggest the set value. .. Further, for example, when a plurality of combinations of small hit symbols (combinations of decorative symbols) are provided, the small hit symbols are configured to be associated with the set values, and any of the small hit symbols is stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that the set value is suggested depending on the combination. Further, for example, in the case of configuring so as to be able to shift to the so-called probabilistic incubation period after a sudden big hit or small hit, the set value can be suggested depending on whether the probabilistic incubation period after the small hit is long or short, or the probabilistic incubation period. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting a set value inside.

Further, in this example, the case where the production stage is changed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied with the end of the small hit game is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed, and the production stage may be changed assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on winning the lottery. Further, for example, the effect stage may be changed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the number of times the variation display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times.

Next, an effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect will be described. 20-41 and 20-42 are explanatory views for explaining the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect. In addition, in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, it is assumed that the production modes change in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

As shown in FIG. 20-41 (A), a new start prize is generated in the first start winning opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and four first hold displays are accumulated in the first hold storage display unit 121IW109. It is assumed that the state has been reached. Then, it is assumed that the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is decided based on the new start winning to the first starting winning opening.

Next, when the first variation display is executed after the start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening, the look-ahead zone effect based on the initial effect pattern is executed as shown in FIG. 20-41 (B). In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (B), the image display device 5 shows a case where the character 121IW110 is displayed and the character display 121IW111 of "zone entry!" Is displayed as a line of the character 121IW110. ..

If a big hit occurs in the first variation display, the look-ahead zone effect is ended as it is, and the screen does not move to the subsequent effect screen shown in FIGS. 20-41 (C) (hence, in this case, the look-ahead zone). Although the production is executed, the setting value is not practically suggested).

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when the second variation display is executed after the start prize is generated in the first start-up winning opening (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (C), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (C), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the dialogue of the character 121IW110 is "If it hits now, the setting is" 1 "? The character display 121IW112 is displayed.

If a big hit occurs in the second variation display, the look-ahead zone effect is ended as it is, and the screen does not shift to the subsequent effect screen shown in FIGS. 20-41 (D). In this case, "If you hit now, setting" 1 "? It is suggested that the set value is set to "1" based on the fact that a big hit occurred when the character display 121IW112 of "" was displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when the third variation display is executed after the start prize is generated in the first start-up winning opening (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (D), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41 (D), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the dialogue of the character 121IW110 is "If it hits now, the setting is" 2 "? The character display 121IW113 is displayed.

If a big hit occurs in the third variation display, the look-ahead zone effect is ended as it is, and the screen does not shift to the subsequent effect screen shown in FIGS. 20-41 (D). In this case, "If you hit now, setting" 2 "? It is suggested that the set value is set to "2" based on the fact that a big hit occurred when the character display 121IW113 of "" was displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when the fourth variation display is executed after the start prize is generated in the first start-up winning opening (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-42 (E), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-42 (E), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the dialogue of the character 121IW110 is "If it hits now, the setting" 3 "? The character display 121IW114 is displayed.

If a big hit occurs in the third variation display, the look-ahead zone production ends. In this case, "If you hit now, setting" 3 "? It is suggested that the set value is set to "3" based on the fact that a big hit occurred when the character display 121IW114 of "" was displayed. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect is terminated even when a big hit does not occur in the third variable display (therefore, in this case, the so-called Gase look-ahead zone effect is executed. ).

Note that FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42 are examples. For example, even when the second variation display is executed after the start winning, the ratio is low in FIGS. 20-41 (C). In some cases, a look-ahead zone effect suggesting a set value "2" or "3" is executed (see FIGS. 20-28). Further, for example, even when the third variation display is executed after the start winning, in FIG. 20-41 (D), the look-ahead zone effect suggesting the set values "1" and "3" is executed at a low rate. (See Figure 20-28). Further, for example, even when the fourth variation display is executed after the start winning, in FIG. 20-42 (E), the look-ahead zone effect suggesting the set values "1" and "2" is executed at a low rate. (See Figure 20-28).

Further, in this example, when the first variable display is executed after the start winning, the look-ahead zone effect is executed based on the initial effect pattern, and the character display 121IW111 of "zone entry!" Is displayed. However, even when the first variation display is executed, the effect suggesting the set values "1" to "3" in the same manner as in FIGS. 20-41 (C) to 20-42 (E). May be configured to execute.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value is suggested as assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of a big hit during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured so that the set value is suggested as if the predetermined condition is satisfied by displaying a predetermined character or emitting a lamp or LED during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect. Can be considered.

Further, in this example, the case where the look-ahead zone effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays is shown, but the setting value is suggested not only in such a mode but also in the effect executed during one variable display, for example. It may be configured as possible. For example, a gauge display in which the indicator moves with the passage of time is displayed on the image display device 5 during one fluctuation display, and at which point in the gauge display the indicator is located, some production achievement condition is satisfied ( For example, it may be configured so that the set value is suggested based on winning the battle or clearing the mission).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation displays, "If it hits now, the setting is" 1 "" for each fluctuation display. ?? Or "If you hit it now, setting" 2 "? The case where the current setting value is suggested by displaying a character display such as "" is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, during one fluctuation display, "If you hit now, setting" 1 "? Or "If you hit it now, setting" 2 "? Even if the character display such as "" is switched in order and displayed, the current setting value is suggested by the content of the character display that was finally displayed when a big hit occurred at the end of the variable display. Good. For example, "If you hit now, setting" 2 "? When the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of "" is displayed, it is suggested that the setting value is "2", and "If it hits now, the setting is" 3 "? When the variable display ends and a big hit occurs while the character display of "" is displayed, it may be suggested that the set value is "3". Further, when the character display is switched in order during one variable display, for example, the character display may be switched at the timing of the occurrence of the advance notice effect or the timing of the development of the reach effect. Good. Further, for example, in the case of a variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream, the character display may be switched at the timing of re-variation.

Next, the production mode of the suggestion effect during reach will be described. 20-43 and 20-44 are explanatory views for explaining the effect mode of the suggestion effect during reach. In addition, in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, it is assumed that the production modes change in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

As shown in FIG. 20-43 (A), when the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, the super reach D is executed as the type of super reach based on the fact that the super reach is specified in the variation pattern. (Refer to FIGS. 20-25), and it is assumed that the icon pattern 5 is determined as the icon pattern (see FIGS. 20-26 (A) to (D)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (in this example, the symbol "7"), and normal reach occurs. Next, when the start timing of the super reach comes, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (C), in the image display device 5, the panel image A121IW115 corresponding to the super reach A is first, and the panel image B121IW116 corresponding to the super reach B is started. , The panel image C121IW117 corresponding to the super reach C and the panel image C121IW118 corresponding to the super reach D are displayed in an overlapping state in order. Further, based on the determination of the icon pattern 5, the icon image "●" 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116, the icon image "▲" 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. The icon image "★" 121IW121 is displayed.

Next, when the operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected once, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (D), the leading panel image A121IW115 is erased, and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top. ..

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B and the number of repeated hits reaches the first predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the first panel image B121IW116 is erased as shown in FIG. 20-44 (E). The panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top.

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B and the number of repeated hits reaches the second predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the first panel image C121IW117 is erased as shown in FIG. 20-44 (F). Only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed.

After that, when the development timing of the super reach comes, as shown in FIG. 20-44 (G), the last remaining panel image D121IW118 is displayed in such a manner that it is enlarged on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and FIG. 20- As shown in 44 (H), the effect of developing into Super Reach D is executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the icon image “★” 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118 that is finally displayed at the top, so that the current setting value is set. It is suggested that it is likely to be "3".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the case where the execution of the super reach D is decided is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the super reach A is decided, the push button is displayed. Even if the 31B is operated, the panel image A121IW115 shown in FIG. 20-43 (C) remains displayed at the beginning and does not change, and when the development timing of the super reach comes, the panel image A121IW115 displays the image display device 5. An enlarged mode is displayed on the entire screen, and an effect of a mode that develops into Super Reach A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of Super Reach B is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image B121IW116 shown in FIG. 20-43 (D) can be changed only to the state where it is displayed at the beginning. Instead, when the development timing of the super reach is reached, the panel image B121IW116 is displayed in an enlarged manner on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect of developing the super reach B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of Super Reach C is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image C121IW117 shown in FIG. 20-44 (E) can be changed only to the state where it is displayed at the head. Instead, when the development timing of the super reach comes, the panel image C121IW117 is displayed in an enlarged manner on the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect of developing the super reach C is executed.

Further, for example, even though the execution of the super reach D is decided, the player does not operate the push button 31B at all or repeatedly hits the second predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 20-44 (F). It is also conceivable that the panel image D121IW118 does not change until only the displayed state is displayed. In that case, in this example, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. , Develops into Super Reach D. However, if the push button 31B has not been operated even once and the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the beginning, in this example, the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the beginning. Without doing so, it develops into Super Reach A.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even if the push button 31B is not operated even once, it may be configured to forcibly develop into super reach D. Further, even when the execution of Super Reach D is decided, if it does not change to the state where only the panel image 121IW118 is displayed, it finally corresponds to the panel image displayed at the beginning. It may be configured to develop into Super Reach B or Super Reach C.

Further, for example, when the player does not operate the push button 31B, it may be configured to develop into a super reach having nothing to do with the suggestion of the set value.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the case where the icon images 121IW119 to 121 are displayed and the in-reach suggestion effect is executed is shown. For example, the icon pattern 1 is determined and the in-reach suggestion is performed. When it is determined that the effect is not executed, only the panel images are displayed in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (G), and the icon images are not displayed.

In this example, the icon image is not displayed at all when the suggestion effect during reach is not executed during super reach, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the suggestion effect during reach is not executed, an item image having nothing to do with the set value may be displayed on each panel image so as not to have anything to do with the suggestion of the set value. ..

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the panel images are erased one by one according to the operation of the push button 31B, so that the stages of the super reach effect are one by one. Although the case where the set value is suggested in the production of the ascending mode is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when displaying a meter display that gradually raises the meter level according to the operation of the player, an icon image or a telop display corresponding to the set value is displayed to suggest the set value. May be good. Further, for example, the reach effect itself such as super reach does not change stepwise, and only the icon image and the telop display corresponding to the set value change stepwise according to the operation of the player. You may. Further, for example, it is not always necessary to involve the operation of the player, and the icon image and the telop display corresponding to the set value may be configured to change stepwise regardless of the operation, and various production modes may be used. Conceivable.

Further, for example, the suggestion effect during reach and the display result of the variable display as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 may be associated with each other. For example, when a big hit occurs in the variation display when the in-reach suggestion effect as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 is executed, the set value suggested in the in-reach suggestion effect is determined. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine that the value is equal to or higher than the set value suggested by the suggestion effect during reach.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (E), icon images are visibly displayed for panel images other than the panel image displayed at the beginning. Although the case is shown, the case is not limited to such a mode, and the icon image may be displayed only in the panel image displayed at the head. In this case, for example, in FIG. 20-43 (C), since the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the beginning, the panel image B121IW116 to the panel image D121IW118 are all displayed in a state where the icon image is not displayed. Then, in FIG. 20-43 (D), when the panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116. Then, in FIG. 20-44 (E), when the panel image B121IW116 is erased and the panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117. Then, in FIG. 20-44 (F), when the panel image C121IW117 is erased and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed, the icon image 121IW121 may be displayed on the panel image D121IW118. Good.

Further, in this example, for example, even though the execution of the super reach D is decided, the player does not repeatedly hit the push button 31B up to the second predetermined number, and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. If there is no change, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. However, when the icon image is configured to be displayed only for the panel image displayed at the beginning as described above, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are not displayed at the beginning. The icon image of the image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 may not be displayed. Further, even when the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are displayed in order for a very short time (for example, 1 second) so that the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are displayed in order, which is extremely short. The icon image may be displayed on the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 for a time (for example, 1 second).

In the feature unit 121IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or pre-game suggestion effect or in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately notified. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. You may give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 121IW, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative symbol is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative symbol arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting is changed. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the rate of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the even-numbered effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect of displaying characters and pictures by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, and includes a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating a movable member and a stick controller 31A, and a control for emitting a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others to reduce (or make it difficult to notice) the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 121IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold memory becoming 0 and the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold memory number occurs. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the predetermined operation valid period, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting (for example, the display control of the predetermined image, the output control of the predetermined sound, the predetermined sound). (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 121IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification example 1)
For example, the feature portion 121IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 121IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B), a security cover 121IW500B composed of a short piece 121IW500Ba and a long piece 121IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 121IW201. The right end of the long piece 121IW500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position. Provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 121IW201, and is set via the through hole 121IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 121IW500Bb. The key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be operated. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500B (long piece 121IW500Bb) covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 121IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state by restricting the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 121IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45 (A) and 20-45 (B), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the substrate case 121IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the board case 121IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 121IW500B with respect to the board case 121IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (A), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 121IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 121IW201. By sliding the board case 121IW201 to the length L2 (making the pachinko game machine 1 an allowable state), a pachinko game clerk or the like operates the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052. The set value of the machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-46 (B), the security cover 121IW500B is attached to the board case 121IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 121IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 121IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 121IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 is set by the security cover 121IW500B. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 121IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 121IW001a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 121IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is maintained by the security cover 121IW500B. ..

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-47 (A) and 20-47 (B) as modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 121IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. A cover position that covers the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 and rotation from the covering position are centered on the pivot axis 121IW500Cd that faces in the vertical direction provided on the back side of the frame 121IW003. It may be rotatably pivotally supported from the uncovered position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 121IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 121IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 121IW001a, and the long piece 121IW500Cb is set and switched to the setting key 121IW051. The rotation of the switch 121IW052 from the back surface side to the back surface side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500C is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 121IW201 to form the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. It suffices to release the state of covering with and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the rotation is restricted with the security cover 121IW500C (long piece 121IW500Cb) covering the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the security cover 121IW500C is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 121IW201 to press the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-48 (A), the security cover 121IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 121IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an allowable state. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 20-48 (B), the security cover 121IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 121IW500C. If the 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 121IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a and close the gaming machine frame 121IW003. Is impossible.

Therefore, in the present modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 is set by the security cover 121IW500C. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification example 3)
Further, the feature portion 121IW exemplifies a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 121IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed by opening 121IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 121IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 20-49 (A) to 20-49 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through-hole 121IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 121IW003 so that the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can be operated via the through-hole 121IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface on the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

When the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 can be operated via the through hole 121IW003b, a door body 121IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 121IW003b is provided, and the door body 121IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-49 (B) and 20-49 (C), when the door body 121IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 121IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 121IW003a. Since the 121IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 121IW003a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

(Modification example 4)
In this feature unit 121IW, the case where the setting value is suggested by changing the effect stage after the end of the small hit game and switching to the background image according to the changed effect stage is shown, but it fluctuates after the end of the small hit game. It may be configured to suggest the set value by switching the pattern table and executing a series of set value suggestion effects over a plurality of variable displays. Hereinafter, a modification 4 in which the fluctuation pattern table is switched after the small hit game is completed will be described.

In the fourth modification, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ends the small hit game, specifically, in the small hit end process (step S120) in the special symbol process process. A post-small hit flag indicating that it is after the end of the small hit game shall be set.

FIG. 20-50 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the modified example 4. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit post-flag is set (step 121IWS1101). If the post-small hit flag is not set (that is, not after the end of the small hit game), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern, whether it is a big hit, whether it is a small hit, or whether it is a big hit. The fluctuation pattern determination table according to the type and the small hit type is selected (step 121IWS1102). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS1107.

If the small hit after flag is set (that is, after the small hit game ends), the CPU 103 sets the value of the small hit after number counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the small hit game ends to 1. Add (step 121 IWS 1103). Further, the CPU 103 selects a fluctuation pattern determination table for after a small hit as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 121IWS1104).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the counter for the number of times after a small hit is a predetermined value (for example, 3) (step 121IWS1105). If the value of the counter for the number of times after a small hit is not a predetermined value, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS1107. If the value of the small hit post-count counter is a predetermined value, the CPU 103 resets the small hit post flag and resets (0 clears) the small hit post counter (step 121IWS1106). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS1107.

Then, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern determination table selected in steps 121IWS1102 and 1104 to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the variation pattern (step 121IWS1107).

In the modified example 4, by executing the processes of steps 121IWS1103 to S1107, only after the small hit, until the variation display for a predetermined value (for example, three variation displays) is completed after the end of the small hit game. The fluctuation pattern of is determined. In this example, it is assumed that a fixed fluctuation pattern is determined with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern dedicated to after a small hit.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, even before the end of the variation display for a predetermined value after the end of the small hit game, if a big hit or a small hit occurs, it is for a big hit or a small hit. It may be configured to determine the variation pattern for hitting.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121 IWS1108).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS1109). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step 121IWS1110).

FIG. 20-51 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the modified example 4. In the modified example 4, the processing of steps 121IWS601 to S602 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 20-24. When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 121IWS601 is a variation pattern dedicated after a small hit (step). 121IWS631). In the case of the fluctuation pattern dedicated to after the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect count counter for counting the number of effects of the small hit post-suggestion effect suggesting the set value after the end of the small hit game to 1. Add (step 121 IWS632).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect count counter after addition is 1 (step 121 IWS633). If the value of the effect count counter is not 1 (that is, when the fluctuation display is performed for the second and subsequent times after the end of the small hit game), the process proceeds to step 121IWS636 as it is. If the value of the effect count counter is 1 (that is, when the first variation display after the end of the small hit game is performed), the effect control CPU 120 is small for determining the type of the effect suggestive effect after the small hit. Using the post-hit suggestion effect determination table, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed to determine the type of small hit post-suggestion effect (step 121IWS634). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined type of post-small hit suggestion effect in the storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 121IWS635).

FIG. 20-52 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table after a small hit. As shown in FIGS. 20-52, in this example, there are three types of post-small hit suggestion effects 1-3. In this example, the suggestion effect after the small hit fluctuates over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, in a total of 90 seconds of three fluctuation displays fixed at 30 seconds after the small hit), the first time, the second time, and the third time. It is configured as a series of effects that are executed in such a way that the story develops in order as the display is executed. Of these, the small hit post-suggestion effect 1 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects are executed and finally the set value is "1" (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and at the final third variation. A character reminiscent of the set value "1" wins the battle). In addition, the small hit post-suggestion effect 2 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects are executed and finally the set value is "2" (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations and is set at the final third variation. A character reminiscent of the value "2" wins the battle). Further, the small hit post-suggestion effect 3 is an effect that suggests that a series of effects are executed and finally the set value is "3" (for example, a battle effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations and is set at the final third variation. A character reminiscent of the value "3" wins the battle).

As shown in FIGS. 20-52, in this example, when the set value is "1", the suggestion effect 1 after a small hit is selected at a high rate, and when the set value is "2", after a small hit. The ratio of selecting the suggestion effect 2 is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio of selecting the suggestion effect 3 after a small hit is high.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of the determined small hit post-suggestion effect (step 121IWS636). In this case, in the case of the first variation display after the end of the small hit game (in the case of Y in step 121IWS633), it is determined in step 121IWS634 and stored in the RAM 122 in step 121IWS635 according to the type of suggestion effect after small hit. Select a process table. Further, in the case of the second variation display after the end of the small hit game (in the case of N in step 121IWS633), the type of the suggestion effect after the small hit determined in the first variation display after the end of the small hit game is Since it should be stored in the RAM 122, a process table according to the type is selected for the small hit post-suggestion effect stored in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS617. The processes after step 121 IWS617 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 20-24.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not dedicated after a small hit (N in step 121IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears 0) the effect number counter (step 121IWS637). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS603. The processes after step 121 IWS603 are the same as those processes shown in FIGS. 20-24.

In this example, after the end of the small hit game, a fixed fluctuation display of 30 seconds is performed over 3 fluctuations, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects are executed for a total of 90 seconds. The number of fluctuations and the period to be executed are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, after the end of the small hit game, a fixed fluctuation display for 20 seconds may be performed over 4 fluctuations, and a series of post-small hit suggestion effects may be executed for a total of 80 seconds.

As described above, the feature portion 121IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-201002 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more regular (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by a random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect of the gaming machines in the gaming machines configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. .. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100).
With a specific effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing the effect stage) based on being controlled to the special state. With
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to a set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 121 IWS1009 as shown in FIGS. 20-38. Whether or not the production stage is changed is determined at a different rate depending on the value)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, control to a special state is performed by a specific effect. Can be noticed, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the first invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
A special state control means that can control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100).
With a specific effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing the effect stage) based on being controlled to the special state. With
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to a set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 121 IWS1009 as shown in FIGS. 20-38. Whether or not to change the production stage at different rates depending on the value),
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, control to a special state is performed by a specific effect. Can be noticed, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small hit game state based on small hit types A to C).
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a manner suggesting the set set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the set value "1" is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A. The setting value "2" is suggested by changing to the production stage B, and the setting value "3" is suggested by changing to the production stage C),
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by executing the specific effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C). The suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The specific production execution means is
Depending on the mode in which the effect state is changed after the special state is completed, the specific effect may or may not be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the effect stage may or may not be changed). There is),
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode in which the effect state is changed after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the set value “1”. ~ Depending on which of "3" it is, the ratio determined as no change or change in the production stage (change to production stage A, change to production stage B, change to production stage C) is different)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode in which the specific effect executing means shifts to the specific effect state among the plurality of types of effect states after the special state is ended, depending on the set value (for example, the figure). As shown in 20-38, the stage C may be changed only when the set value is "3").
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variable pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern). Step 121 (the part where steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 are executed) and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) that executes variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determination means determines the variable display pattern by switching the variable display pattern determination data after the special state is completed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variable display pattern when it is Y in step 121IWS1101). To execute),
The specific effect executing means executes a series of specific effects in a manner suggesting a set value over a plurality of variable displays (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 121IWS631, steps 121IWS632 to S636). To execute)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the second suggestion effect). By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the first invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the first invention described above.

Further, the feature portion 121IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-201002 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more regular (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by a random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect of the gaming machines in the gaming machines configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. .. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
In a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing an effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a small hit). Step 121 (part for executing IWS1008 to S1011)
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to a set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 121 IWS1009 as shown in FIGS. 20-38. Whether or not the production stage is changed is determined at a different rate depending on the value)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, a specific effect is produced over a plurality of variable displays. Can be executed, so the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
In a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an effect by changing an effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a small hit). Step 121 (part for executing IWS1008 to S1011)
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to a set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 121 IWS1009 as shown in FIGS. 20-38. Whether or not to change the production stage at different rates depending on the value),
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, a specific effect is produced over a plurality of variable displays. Can be executed, so the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

In addition, it is suggested that the mode of the corresponding display changes for a specific effect that is executed over a plurality of variable displays based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and is executed at different execution ratios according to the set setting value. It may be executed in the change suggestion effect. For example, according to the set value, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed at different execution ratios, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is counted over a plurality of variable displays, and the counting result is counted by the player. The set value may be suggested by notifying the user. In this case, if the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect is likely to increase when the set value is set to be advantageous to the player, the number of executions of the success mode change suggestion effect increases. The change suggestion effect can be easily executed, and the player can be given an image that is likely to be set to a setting value that is advantageous to the player, so that the player's expectation can be further improved. You can improve your interest.
In addition, depending on the set value, a specific effect (for example, change of the effect stage) and a change suggestion effect of the success mode (for example, the ball thrown by the character hits the active display and is actively displayed) with different execution ratios. May be executed. In this way, since there are a plurality of suggestion elements of the set value, it is not easy to guess the set value, so that the player's attention can be easily maintained, and one of the suggestion elements is a set value that is advantageous to the player. If the tendency when is set to is shown, it is possible to give the player an image that is likely to be set to a setting value that is advantageous to the player, so that the player's expectation can be improved. , Can improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit types A to C) different from the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a manner suggesting the set set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the set value "1" is suggested by being changed to the effect stage A. The setting value "2" is suggested by changing to the production stage B, and the setting value "3" is suggested by changing to the production stage C),
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by executing the specific effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type C). The suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed later has the highest reliability, and the suggestion of the set value by the effect stage changed after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) is provided.
The specific production execution means is
Depending on the mode in which the effect state is changed after the special state is completed, the specific effect may or may not be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the effect stage may or may not be changed). There is),
Depending on the set value, the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode in which the effect state is changed after the special state is finished (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-38, the set value “1”. ~ Depending on which of "3" it is, the ratio determined as no change or change in the production stage (change to production stage A, change to production stage B, change to production stage C) is different)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on the mode in which the specific effect executing means shifts to the specific effect state among the plurality of types of effect states after the special state is ended, depending on the set value (for example, the figure). As shown in 20-38, the stage C may be changed only when the set value is "3").
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) is provided.
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern using variable display pattern determination data (for example, a variable pattern determination table) for determining a variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern). Step 121 (the part where steps 121IWS1101 to S1107 are executed) and
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120) that executes variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
After finishing the special state, the variable display pattern determining means switches the variable display pattern determination data to determine the variable display pattern (for example, when the game control microcomputer 100 is Y in step 121IWS1101, steps 121IWS1103 to Execute S1107),
The specific effect executing means executes a series of specific effects in a manner suggesting a set value over a plurality of variable displays (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 121IWS631, steps 121IWS632 to S636). To execute)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the second suggestion effect). By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the second invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the second invention described above.

Further, the feature portion 121IW includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-201002 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more regular (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by a random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect of the gaming machines in the gaming machines configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. .. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention that solves the problem.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a look-ahead zone effect) over a predetermined period of time.
The effect can be executed so that the set value is suggested by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit) during the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28, the look-ahead zone effect). It is suggested that the set value is "1" if a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the pattern 1, and the set value "2" if a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2. If a big hit occurs during execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3, it is suggested that the set value is "3").
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the third invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
It is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a look-ahead zone effect) over a predetermined period of time.
The effect can be executed so that the set value is suggested by satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit) during the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28, the look-ahead zone effect). It is suggested that the set value is "1" if a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the pattern 1, and the set value "2" if a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect by the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2. If a big hit occurs during execution of the look-ahead zone effect according to the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3, it is suggested that the set value is "3").
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value. In addition, the degree of attention to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed can be increased to improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The effect executing means can execute the effect so that the suggested set value differs depending on at which timing during the execution of the specific effect the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28). In addition, when the set value "1" is suggested in the second variation look-ahead zone effect and a big hit occurs, the accuracy of the set value "1" is high, and the set value "2" in the third variation look-ahead zone effect. If is suggested and a big hit is made, the accuracy of the set value is "2", and if the set value "3" is suggested in the 4th variation look-ahead zone effect and the big hit is made, the set value "3" The accuracy is high)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
A deciding means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, a portion for executing step 121 IWS 110 in the game control microcomputer 100), and
Prior to the determination by the determination means, a determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a portion for executing step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads based on the symbol designation command in the pre-reading advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 20-20. (Determine the execution of zone production)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the second suggestion effect). By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 4 of the third invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the third invention described above.

Further, the feature portion 121IW includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-201002 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more regular (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by a random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the effect of the gaming machines in the gaming machines configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. .. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps 121IWS603 to S605 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the suggestion effect during reach) is executed, and the suggestion effect during reach is performed in step 121IWS616. The part that selects the corresponding process table and executes steps 121 IWS618 and S805) is provided.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect in an manner of changing the suggested set value in response to the player's motion being detected a plurality of times by the motion detection means (for example, for effect control). CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS806 to S817)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on the set value, and
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps 121IWS603 to S605 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the suggestion effect during reach) is executed, and the suggestion effect during reach is performed in step 121IWS616. The part that selects the corresponding process table and executes steps 121 IWS618 and S805) is provided.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect in an manner of changing the suggested set value in response to the player's motion being detected a plurality of times by the motion detection means (for example, for effect control). CPU 120 executes steps 121 IWS806 to S817),
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A reach effect executing means capable of executing a reach effect (for example, super reach) (for example, a portion in which a process table corresponding to the super reach is selected in step 121 IWS 616 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 121 IWS 618 and S805 are executed) is provided.
The effect can be executed so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-44 (F), in response to the operation of the push button 31B. The panel images are erased one by one),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect by changing the setting value suggested at the timing when the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIGS. 20-43 (C) to 20-. As shown in 44 (F), the panel images displaying the icon images 121IW119 to 120 suggesting the set value are deleted one by one).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means may or may not execute the suggestion effect when the effect is executed so that the reach effect to be executed changes stepwise (for example, FIGS. 20-26 and 20-). As shown in 27, there are cases where icon patterns 2 to 9 in which the icon image is displayed are selected, and cases in which icon pattern 1 in which the icon image is not displayed is selected).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The reliability of the reach effect differs depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect (for example, when the set value is "1" as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A)). When icon pattern 2 is selected, it is confirmed that it is a big hit)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect and the reach effect, the reliability of the set value suggested by the suggestion effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 200-27). When the icon image with the icon pattern 9 is displayed in the reach, the expectation that the setting value is "3" is high).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
An information output means (for example, a part for executing steps 121IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, a during-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120). 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the second suggestion effect). By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in a gaming machine configured so that the control of the advantageous state can be executed based on the set value. can do.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the fourth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fourth invention described above.

Further, the feature portion 121IW includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 121 IWS512, S707, S904).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 121 IWS512, S707, S904).
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 121 IWS510, S705, S902 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 121IWS512, S707, and S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that the data capacity may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

In the feature unit 121IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. is there.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) may be further provided. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which make it difficult to perform. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fifth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is regulated, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-45 to 20-. 48)
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 12 of the fifth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fifth invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S708 in step 121IWS513. When N is N in N, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is set to N, S708 in step 121 IWS513. When N is N in N, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed),
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) may be further provided. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which make it difficult to perform. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is regulated, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-45 to 20-. 48)
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 11 of the sixth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the sixth invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. Based on the value, it is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-2010902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. 121IWS029 execution part) and
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 121 IWS031 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 120 includes steps 121 IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect can not be executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode).
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 121IWS031 and S108. To do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a jackpot suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Step 121 IWS510, S705, S902 is executed based on the set value),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 121IWS514. , S709, S906)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give a motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) may be further provided. , It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-34 (D)). It is stated that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the seventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is stated that it is possible to further provide an accessory effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc., which make it difficult to perform. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the seventh invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the seventh invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulating member (for example, a curity cover 121IW500A / security cover 121IW500B / security cover 121IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is regulated by the regulating member, and the regulated state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is regulated, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open. Is released from the regulated state by the security cover 121IW500A, and is in a permissible state in which the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. FIGS. 20-2, 20-3, 20-45 to 20-. 48)
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 12 of the 7th invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the 7th invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the 7th invention described above.

It should be noted that the feature unit 121IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the effect mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the fifth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the sixth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is executably configured as the suggestive effect (the configuration of the seventh invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch which of the control methods of the fifth invention to the seventh invention described above is used to execute the suggestion effect according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, when the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player. The configuration (the configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention) is configured so that if the gaming state is a time-saving state, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted when the set value information is not input normally (the above-mentioned sixth invention). (Structure) If the game state is a probabilistic state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The above-mentioned configuration of the seventh invention) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to make the suggestion effect executable by all the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions shown above, and the suggestive effect is made executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 121IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the set value command is received but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestion effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in is not the same as the set value stored last time, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as the set values "1" and "3", consecutive villas (that big hits occur continuously during a probable change state) are likely to occur and consecutive villas occur. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and in the case of an even number setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the likelihood of occurrence of consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above. It may be configured to do (restrict the suggestion effect).

Further, the control method for executing the suggestion effect when the set value commands shown in the fifth to seventh inventions above cannot be normally received includes the look-ahead zone effect as the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect during reach, and the effect stage. It is also possible to apply it to the production by changing.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. A game machine that is characterized by being able to execute (such as or initial roll production) is described. According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing pachinko.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. And initial roll production, etc.)
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and to motivate the player to play the game from an early time zone. Can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying identification information for production (for example, a decorative pattern).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and according to such a configuration, the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). As shown in -23 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used.)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 5 of the eighth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eighth invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 have a problem that they cannot effectively give motivation to play a game and cannot sufficiently enhance their interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period of time, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, after the setting is changed until the variation display is executed 30 times) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), 20-30 (A), (B)).
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period of time, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed (for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect reaches the predetermined number, and a specific super reach effect. The suggestion effect can be executed based on (for example, the advance notice effect has been executed) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 5 of the ninth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the ninth invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestive effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further includes a notification means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , You can check the suggestive effects that have been performed in the past, and you can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.).
Further provided with a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to confirm the suggestion effect executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game interest. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the tenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the tenth invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, the interest may be lowered. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided with a limiting means (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 20-34. (D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eleventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) Predetermined effect execution means that can execute light guide plate effect, error display, etc.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided with a limiting means (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). See D)),
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
When the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap, the limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 20-34 (D). )
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 121IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the eleventh invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eleventh invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eleventh invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the twelfth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902 have a problem that the execution of the setting suggestion effect, which is not preferable for the player, may reduce the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A game machine that is characterized by having more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.) is described, and according to these features, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the twelfth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, and
It is provided with a setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set setting value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.).
Predetermined notification means capable of executing predetermined notification in a manner in which it becomes difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is equipped with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.)
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, an accessory effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 121IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 121IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) that emits light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. See FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. , A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 20-34 (Fig. 20-34). A), (see (B)) can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (E)).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is provided with setting suggestion setting means capable of setting the execution ratio of setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operating means such as the push button 31B and the operating means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating (only the person can operate).
It is stated that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 8 of the twelfth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the twelfth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the twelfth invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the thirteenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
The setting means is such that the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value-adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and 20-5 (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set set value may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means can execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state regardless of a set value. It is described that such a configuration may enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can control any of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machine of the means 2 to the means 10 of the thirteenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the thirteenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the thirteenth invention described above.

The feature portion 121IW also includes the 14th invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 14th invention that solves the problem.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the 14th invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (eg, fluctuation time) for the variable display varies depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
further,
A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to a variable display, and
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the ball thrown by the character hitting the active display 30TM003 as shown in the change suggestion effect of the success mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2)). The effect of changing the mode) and the effect of suggesting the change of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and does not change the display mode. ) Is feasible,
Depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, a decorative symbol (re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop) within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state). The next change suggestion effect will be displayed during the period until the combination of decorative symbols or the pseudo-continuous symbol) temporarily stops, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. The execution rate is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 23-16, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and one is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the 14th invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the 14th invention,
It is stated that the display result of the variable display may be displayed differently depending on the set value, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the 14th invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-adding means that adds game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
The setting means is such that the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value-adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the 14th invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the 14th invention,
Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the 14th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, general winning opening 50A to general winning opening 50D, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first major winning opening, second major winning opening 712). The game value-giving means for giving game value (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information on the game value given by the game value adding means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 121IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 7 of the 14th invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the 14th invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the 14th invention described above.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 121IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when executing the look-ahead zone effect, the in-reach suggestion effect, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect shown in the feature unit 121IW, the look-ahead zone effect or reach When a predetermined period has passed from the start of the middle suggestion effect, the effect by changing the effect stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect, the look-ahead zone effect and the reach suggestion in the same manner as the feature section 31AK. The titles corresponding to the production, the production by changing the production stage, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be configured to be able to be notified.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect), and a title notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F), and further, a variable display is provided. A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to (variable display of special symbol, variable display of decorative symbol) and a change suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes. A change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect is provided, and the change suggestion effect execution means is a change suggestion effect of a successful mode (FIGS. 23-18 (1), As shown in (2), the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode) and the failure mode change suggestion effect (shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20)). As described above, the ball thrown by the character can be repelled by the active display 30TM003 to perform an effect that does not change the display mode), and within a predetermined period (for example, the start of fluctuation) depending on the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode. Within the period from the start of the change to the establishment of the reach state, and within the period from the start of the fluctuation to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-ream symbol that will be re-variated (pseudo-ream) after the temporary stop). The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs during the period from the start of the fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right (for example, as shown in FIGS. 23-16, the second time. At the stage where the change suggestion effect is executed, if the change suggestion effect is executed twice, the third change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 100%, and one is the success mode and the first is the failure mode. The third change suggestion effect may not be executed).

According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and improve the interest.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of the effect and increase the degree of attention to the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed to improve the interest, variable display (variable display of special symbols, decoration). A display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing (variable display of symbols) and capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display, and a corresponding display. The change suggestion effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the change suggestion effect is provided, and the change suggestion effect execution means suggests a change of the success mode as the change suggestion effect. An effect (as shown in FIGS. 23-18 (1) and (2), an effect in which the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003 to change the display mode) and an effect suggesting a change in the failure mode (Fig. 23-). As shown in 19 (10) and (20), the ball thrown by the character is repelled by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed), depending on the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, within a predetermined period (for example, within the period from the start of fluctuation to the establishment of the reach state, a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-ream symbol in which re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed after the temporary stop). ) Is temporarily stopped, and within the period from the start of fluctuation to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right), the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs (for example, FIG. 23). As shown in -16, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful modes, the third change suggestion effect is executed at a rate of 100%, and one is the successful mode. If the first time is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, the feature portions of other morphological examples will be described. Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 21-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 21-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 21-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by performing lighting / extinguishing / color development control of the normal symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-3 and 21-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with the display monitor 21TM029. , It also has a function to display various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are taken into the main board 11 to capture the game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to the 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21-3 and 21-5 (A), the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 21-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and is a main substrate. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 21-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 on each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 21-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. As shown in FIG. 2, the outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 described above.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

FIG. 21-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 21-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the gaming board 2. A pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball-out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball-out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted and received at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Specific signal exchanges by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail in FIGS. 21-22 and 21-34 to 36.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 21-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 21-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

The interface board 21TM066 gives the card unit 21TM050 a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated, in response to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

21-4 (A) to 21-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than when the numbers are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to 21-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 21-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

Here, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, information on winning a game, for example, the number of winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening The number of prize balls by winning the (attacker) and the total number of prize balls are input, the number of launched balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 shows the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls, is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker). A certain role ratio (%) and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched, are displayed. The ream ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winning balls below) by winning a prize in the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the total number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and as the passable width of the game ball fluctuates, the expected winning ratio of the game ball fluctuates. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning rate of the game ball is a certain amount.

As for the aggregation and calculation method of the information on the prizes of the game, the consecutive ratio and the role ratio are the prize balls by winning the first starting prize opening (Heso) and the general winning opening (Sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000. Number (number of general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (electric chew), by winning a prize in the large prize opening (attacker) The number of special electric service prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. That is, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 6000 pieces of 11 sets are stored, and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of them can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

The display monitor 21TM029 is based on a base calculated based on 6000 consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), cumulative consecutive ratios (%), combination ratios (%), and the previous 60000 prize balls ( The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew), which are totaled as the game progresses, The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning the big winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces displayed thereafter, it is equivalent to 6000 pieces. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the ream ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the prize balls Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting the total number and performing the aggregation at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, the display timing of the continuous ratio (%) of 6000 pieces).

A storage area for storing information regarding the winning of the game in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and is provided for each set value, such as a general winning ball, a first starting winning opening prize ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, and a special electric service. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in the storage area (ring buffer) according to the set value. Therefore, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the large winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of balls acquired as a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. The total number of hits is the cumulative number of game media that have been hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

Ream ratio = [Number of consecutive characters acquired / Total number of acquired characters] x 100 ... (1)

Role ratio = [(Number of consecutive winning balls + Number of winning balls) / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

Base = [60,000 (total number of prize balls) / total number of hits] x 100 ... (3)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are rounded down) by dividing 42000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period of time. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the operation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, the lower 1 byte, 10h, is rounded down, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In the third calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error will be + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is approximated to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 21TM201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be visually recognized. The board case 21TM201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 11. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029. The "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the operation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, the lower 1 byte, 10h, is rounded down, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball). The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, it is initialized, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is Initialization of the storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur in a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, an error display or a warning display may be performed, or an initialization process may be performed after the error display or the warning display is performed. The error display and warning display will be described further later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1976/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations on the game control microcomputer 100, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following formula. In the division of 1976/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100 and the decimal point is rounded down so that 1976/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the part after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. Will be missing.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) may not be displayed on the display monitor until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter. , Even if the display is performed, it may be notified that the error may be large by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is continuously compared after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as a value of%), there is a risk that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the value of the consecutive combination (%) will deviate. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 21-5 (A) can display a numerical value in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under certain conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

In this embodiment, the sensors provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detect that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result. The present invention is not limited to this, and the detection result is obtained by using a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the game medium winning the electric chew merges. Based on this, the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be totaled.

Hereinafter, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the display of the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 21-3). On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided.

The RAM 102 in the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth. A general prize counter and a large prize counter are provided. In this embodiment, a form in which the number of winnings of the large winning opening (attacker) is totaled by the large winning number counter is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first large winnings are obtained. The number of prizes in the 1st prize opening is provided by separately providing the 1st prize counter that totals the number of prizes in the mouth and the 2nd prize counter that counts the number of prizes in the 2nd prize. And the number of winnings to the second major winning opening may be totaled individually, and the total number of each of these winnings may be used as the number of winnings to the attacker.

The gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 21-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination ratio stored in the RAM 102, which will be described later, is cleared. The clear switch is 21TM052, which is a switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio, or when the calculation of the connection ratio or the combination ratio has to be redone. Therefore, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or combination ratio. Further, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), the main substrate 11 is housed in the substrate case 21TM201. A caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. By providing the caulking pin 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 21TM201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as a “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 21TM011S is attached to the substrate case 21TM201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is enclosed. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing sticker 21TM011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 21TM011S.

The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display monitor 21TM029 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 21-5 (B). The first display unit 21TM029A of the first digit is notified of the aggregated setting values (1 to 6) and the completion of the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode (“C””. ) Is displayed, the aggregation period is displayed on the 2nd digit 2nd display unit 21TM029B and the 3rd digit 3rd display unit 21TM029C, and the 4th digit 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th digit 5th display unit are displayed. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on 21TM029E. The display No. 1 displays the short-term continuous ratio, and the display No. 2 displays the short-term combination ratio. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. If so, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, "A7." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E.

The main board 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The number of game balls that have entered and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the outlet are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 103 includes a gate switch 21, a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a first general winning port switch to a fourth general winning port switch, and an outlet switch 21TM070. Switch processing is performed to check the status of each switch (presence / absence of detection signal).

In this switch processing, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passing number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the detection signal is output. The values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the 2nd general winning opening switch, the 3rd general winning opening switch, and the 4th general winning opening switch, the 1st general winning number counter, the 2nd general winning number counter, and the 3rd general winning number counter. When the values of the counter and the 4th general winning number counter are added and the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added to enter the game ball into each approach area. The number (the number of game balls won in each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch processing), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without executing a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to the increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls to each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening by the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in Fig. 21-6, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is the prize balls by winning the general winning opening (1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening (sode)). ), 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting winning opening (heso)), ordinary electric prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric prize ball (to attacker) The number of prize balls (prize balls by winning a prize). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. In the CPU 103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first start winning opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first start are calculated individually. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be aggregated. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting winning opening The number of prize balls may be calculated together with the number of prize balls.

The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of shots. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas including a counter of a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area including a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. The number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added to the 0th storage area. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total cumulative total for each winning opening. There is. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of a counter of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, in the RAM 102, a continuous ratio combination storage area for storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and the connection ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). It has a base storage area for storing. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the winning ratios and consecutive ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning games to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total, and the 10 sets worth. And the total cumulative combination ratio and connection ratio are stored in the connection ratio combination storage area. The ratio-combination ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. The winning ratios and linkage ratios for 10 sets and the total cumulative total can be stored with a margin at a counter of up to 1 byte, for example, when storing them as integers.

Further, in the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated based on the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time are calculated. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits for the number of winnings of the game ball into each winning opening for 10 sets of the above is stored in the base storage area. When the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a counter having a maximum of 1 byte.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 21-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 21-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is a ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; hereinafter, Of the same), 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to the program management area), and the CPU 103 specifies this ROM area to read data from the ROM 101. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register or goes to the register via this register area. Write the data of.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-8, the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH in this embodiment) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (operation code) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are used. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and reference data referred to by the above control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) are temporarily stored.

Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area is provided with a storage area for storing the total total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a continuous ratio storage area for the total total. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having 1st to 10th storage areas, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). A storage area for the sum of minutes) and a storage area for 10 sets of joint ratios are provided. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area store data in which the start addresses of the subroutines are different from each other.

In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area for each byte. doing.

Further, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 21-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-1), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "1." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-2), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-4), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "8." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-5), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "L." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "0." is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-6), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and the set value "1" is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The characters are displayed, and the characters "6." are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E may be used.
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60,000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character "2" is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches between the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds for display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18B, the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is displayed by the display changeover switch 21TM030. Based on the operation of, the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 display when the set value is "1", and when the set value is "2" Short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative rendezvous, total cumulative role ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ream ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ream ratio, total cumulative total when the set value is "3" It is possible to sequentially change the display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "1", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "2".

In addition, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "2", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "3", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "3".

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "3", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "4", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "4".

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "4", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "5", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "5".

If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "5", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "6", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "6".

Then, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is "6", the first 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 21TM029A is updated to "1", and the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative combination displayed on the 4th display unit 21TM029D and the 5th display unit 21TM029E are updated. The values of ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value "1".

In the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 In, among these ratios, combination ratios, and bases, only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, is calculated and the combination ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. ..

Further, in this embodiment, on the display monitor 21TM029, only the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. The present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term It may be displayed in the same color different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storage area of the total sum and the total total of 10 sets and the storage area of the continuous ratio combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are updated, respectively.

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", and "87", respectively. It is assumed that the numbers are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be erased once and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 21-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, weighting is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operation (step S21TM1040).

Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (initialization of the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S21TM1050), and then performs the RAM 102. Set to the accessible state (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs a clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 (clear signal) input via the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

When the ON state is detected in the status check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. .. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the setting change mode.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). As a result, the game machine, which is the output source of these signals, changes the settings based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to identify that the mode is controlled by the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command for designating that the setting change mode has been controlled as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify the image display device 5 that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is waited for (step S21TM1160), and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 is waited for (step S21TM1180).

In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, the displayed setting value is incremented by 1, and after reaching 6, the display control is executed to return to 1.

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is set. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value is fixed by overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed set value. Then, the fixed set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160) and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180) If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 match, and as a result, the set value of the RAM 102 is stored. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 21-13 described later.

When the OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 described above (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 is set so that the set value can be confirmed. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1210). As a result, the game machine, which is the output source of these signals, changes the settings based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal in the external device such as the hall computer that manages the game information of each game machine. It is possible to identify that the mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, in the display device included in the external device, it is possible to identifiable and notify the gaming machine (for example, the machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command for designating the control to the setting confirmation mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, the lock switch 21TM051 is put on standby for an OFF operation (step S21TM1240).

Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the CPU 103 is described in FIG. 21- The process proceeds to the process of determining whether or not the power failure detection process has been executed in step S21TM1320 shown in 13.

When it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 is a clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. 21-13. (Setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) Check the state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 (step S21TM1310).

In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, if it is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes the power failure detection process (see FIG. 21-14). Whether or not the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area is determined based on whether or not the check data is stored (step S21TM1320).

In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, the setting is changed based on (1) that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF when the power is turned on. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process shifts to the setting confirmation mode and the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same process in the power failure detection process. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (processes of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, regulatory member state specification flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of the output port. The area where the state is saved (output port buffer), the part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and so on. The setting value storage area (the area where the fixed setting value is stored) is also included in the part that should not be initialized. In addition, an area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is also included in the portion that should not be initialized.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the effect device recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

In step S21TM1310, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or when backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), the initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

In this example, as a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 Is also OFF, and on condition that NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the initialization of step S21TM1410 is immediately performed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on the case where the process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting is changed. The setting is based on the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the mode and (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that the mode shifts to the confirmation mode and NO is determined in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode is completed.

In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 before the power supply is stopped is cleared, and the initial value is set. However, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set in the pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

Further, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set in the flag.

In this embodiment, a mode of shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode, provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 21-19 and 21-21). Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step). S21TM1460), the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as a lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, and 8R can be specified. , It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as a game effect lamp 9.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 21-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes the power failure detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), and on condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 is determined via the circuit 110 (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

For example, the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown). Based on the detection of radio waves, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins in any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the large winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. , 2nd start port switch 22B, count switch 23, 1st general winning opening switch to 4th general winning opening switch When a detection signal is input, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal The prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 displays and monitors the winning information processing (step S21TM1640) for calculating the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base, and the winning information such as the winning combination, the continuous ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information processing. The winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) to be displayed on 21TM029 is performed. After that, by executing the predetermined main side error processing (step S21TM1660), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed with an abnormality, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and a step in the next timer interrupt is performed. The game may be stopped (switch processing is not executed) in S21TM1615. After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability fluctuation information, and payout information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and changes the display of the normal symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. It enables the tilting motion setting of one side.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off after that. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted, or a command for notifying that the fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is completed is completed. The set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12 by including the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the existing command such as the above and transmitting the command. Further, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11 to execute an effect suggesting a set value at various timings such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk at the game hall or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), a clerk at the amusement park or the like performs a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processing of step S21TM1130 and step S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this setting value). In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1150).

In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (C), the CPU 103 is a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. Every time an operation is detected, the numerical value (set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Updates are displayed as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (setting value "1" in this example) itself stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (set value "1" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. It is changed (overwritten) to the numerical value (in this example, the setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-15 (D), the CPU 103 enters the set value storage area of the RAM 102 based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like (YES in step S21TM1180). The stored setting value (setting value "1" in this example) is a numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, setting value "2" stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ) Is changed (overwritten), and the set value (set value "2" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is fixed (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display unit 21TM029A to notify the store clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and that the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Notification of completion of setting) (step S21TM1200).

After the lock switch 21TM051 is once turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area). Neither the stored setting value "2") nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (setting value "2" in this example) is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is terminated, and the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state at the time of power failure stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is set. As a result, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. After the RAM clear processing is completed, the CPU 103 notifies the clerk of the amusement park that the RAM clear processing has been executed (RAM clear notification) by displaying "C" on the first display unit 21TM029A. (Step S21TM1420). As a result, the clerk of the amusement park or the like knows that the setting change mode is finished (the setting value is fixed) and the initialization process is executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, the game can be played, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is illustrated. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the setting value, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player (“6” in this embodiment), or the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

Further, the CPU 103 is associated with the end of the setting change mode, and after the RAM clear notification, the display monitor 21TM029 has a set value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) corresponding to the fixed ratio and the combination. Each aggregated value such as ratio and base may be displayed. Further, for each set value, each aggregated value such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set value).

If the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the set value of the RAM 102 is due to the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210 to step S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 21-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a clerk at the game hall or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, so that the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21-16 (B), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process). When the power is turned on (when N is set in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processes of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 are executed by the CPU 103, and the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set value). “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more accurately, the first display unit 21TM029A) (in this example, the setting value). The set value "1") is displayed (step S21TM1230).

Note that, unlike when the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk at the amusement park, the first display unit is displayed. The numerical value displayed on 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value "1" stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a clerk at the amusement park while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example). Then, if the set value "1") stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the set value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting). The setting value "1") stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on the detection of the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the amusement park or the like (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the process of step S21TM1320 or later, the game can be played, that is, the variable display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the variable pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed. That is, when the process of the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the process related to RAM clear unless it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330.

After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information). Neither the set value "1" stored in the temporary storage area nor the set value (set value "1" in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

As shown above, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) is satisfied. ) When the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode that the 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk of the amusement park turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. At this time, the setting change mode is set. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, an operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. Do not perform the operation of. In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the game machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (or not to control any of them), and also perform the initialization process. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization process is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed except when it is determined as NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, when the clerk of the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, even if the power is turned off and then the power is turned on to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the game state remains. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement park side, it is possible to confirm the set value without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the CPU 103 has a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, a base, etc. corresponding to the set value (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 when the setting confirmation mode ends. It is also possible to display each aggregated value of. Further, for each set value, each aggregated value such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending or descending order of the set value).

FIG. 21-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of the transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 21-17 (1) is an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled to the setting change mode, and FIG. 21-17 (2) is an image display when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 21-17 (1), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 21-17 (1), for effect control based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being changed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being changed") notifying the speaker 8L, 8R that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting change mode, so that the setting can be changed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 21-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, if the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a voice notifying that the setting change mode has been entered from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the image display device 5 can be controlled by the display control unit 123), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being changed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 21-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or CPU103 in step S21TM1460). (Based on receiving the power-on initialization command transmitted from the effect control board 12), the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has terminated the setting change mode. It is possible to notify that fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting change completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting change mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the setting change mode is notified that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended, so that the setting change mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 21-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and the game is ready to be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with (execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demo screen, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 21-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (particularly before the weight waiting for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 21-17 (2), for effect control based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main process. The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode and notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters "settings are being confirmed" and outputs a voice (for example, a voice saying "settings are being confirmed") indicating that the speakers 8L and 8R have shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By causing the effect lamp 9 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode, so that the setting confirmation can be performed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 21-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, if the video signal cannot be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, the display control unit 123). Until the image display device 5 can be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). , The image display device 5 does not perform the notification, but the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speakers 8L and 8R output a voice notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a voice saying "setting is being changed"), and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the image display device 5 can be controlled by the display control unit 123), the voice notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 21-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370 or step). The effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of the backup command at the time of power failure recovery or the initialization command at the time of power on, which is transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in S21TM1460). It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has been completed and notify the fact. For example, a voice that displays the characters "setting confirmation completed" on the image display device 5 and notifies that the setting confirmation mode has been output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "setting is being confirmed"). By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the setting confirmation mode is notified that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended, so that the setting confirmation mode can be set. It becomes possible to clearly grasp that it has ended.

Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 21-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and the game is ready to be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with (execution), the image display device 5 transmits an effect control command for displaying the demo screen, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demo screen on the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 21-18 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 21-18 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the “sunny” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 21-18 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the “cloudy” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 21-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 21-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 21-18 (4), the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 21-18 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 21-18 (2), and FIG. 21-. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

Next, the prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

FIG. 21-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 21-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. In addition, the connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed via the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted by one signal line. The connection confirmation signal can be output by setting an initial value in the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically). Is output by the processing of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380, similarly to the game control microcomputer 100. Further, various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 21-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set 8-bit data contents. Will be done.

The connection confirmation command is issued from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1s) in order to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is the control command to be sent. The content of the data of the connection confirmation command is "A0 (H)", that is, "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a connection confirmation command. This is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which the prize ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit "x" Is set to "1". Further, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. When a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, while confirming the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the game control microcomputer causes a predetermined error to occur in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You can notify 100.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. .. The content of the data of the prize ball number command is "5x (H)", that is, "0101xxxxxx". In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is played by the prize opening switch corresponding to the general prize opening 10. When detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the prize ball number command "0100111" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the general prize opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, the prize ball number command "01011010" for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls. The prize ball number command "01011110" for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. The connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are configured so that either of them is transmitted as a prize ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fact that the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning or the like) is satisfied. In this embodiment, as described above, the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but the upper 4 bits are shared and the data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits. You may do so.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", that is, "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, the prize ball end command is not configured to set data indicating error information. This is because the prize ball end command is sent only once when the prize ball operation ends, so even if the error information is not sent at that timing, the data indicating the error information is set and sent to the next connection OK command. Because it is possible to do so. In addition, data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error occurs while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the prize ball operation. It is a control command to be sent based on what you have done. The content of the data of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", that is, "10000xxx". Here, when a prize ball error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the first bit. Further, when a full tank error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the second bit. When a ball-out error occurs, "1" is set in the "x" of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, "1" is set in "x" of the 4th bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. At the same time, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. Similar to the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by making the contents of the lower 4 bits different according to the error state (different predetermined bits). Further, the connection OK command, the prize ball preparing command, and the prize ball end command are configured so that any command is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state in which an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state in which the prize ball operation is being executed.

The command for preparing the prize ball is sent in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the fact that an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

21-21 is a block diagram showing a control signal shown in FIG. 21-19, a signal line used for transmitting and receiving a control command shown in FIG. 21-20, and the like. As shown in FIG. 21-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Further, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. To. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and are output from the serial communication circuit built in the game control microcomputer 100. It is input to 21TM505. Note that FIG. 21-21 shows two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting the prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting the received ACK signal) as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, in reality, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received by one signal line.

Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal consists of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball count command, and the received ACK signal consists of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

FIG. 21-22 is a sequence diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 21-22, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not broken via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. , A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 21-23 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 is first set to prohibit interrupts (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the internal device register setting process of step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, a register setting for setting the channel to be used in the timer mode, a register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and an interrupt vector are set. Register is set. Then, the interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

The interrupt vector set in the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interrupt process includes a payout control process that controls the payout means (at least a process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal regarding prize ball payout from the main board, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request. Processing may be included.) Is executed.

In this embodiment, the interrupt mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, the interrupt process based on the count-up of the built-in CTC can be used. Further, the interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt that occurs when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt. ..

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the prize ball unpaid number counter in the prize ball unpaid number counter.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for.

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initially set, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initially sets the priority of the interrupt process to be executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority initial setting process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied (step S21TM1920). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). Then, since interrupts are prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, interrupts are permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). After that, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of timer interrupt is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when the timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 21-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when the control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1, the state of the input port is not checked directly, but the input state. Check the status of the flag.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 should be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process that controls to pay out the loaned balls in response to the ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and controls to pay out the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). In addition, information output processing for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). Further, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for lighting the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, full tank error, out-of-ball error, prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in the error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. Further, in the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 controls to light the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. Further, when the prize ball payout is completed, the control for turning off the prize ball LED21TM053 is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are used for payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And is updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

Next, in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to send and receive various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to receive the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 21-20 from the game control microcomputer 100. When the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371, like the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 makes an interrupt request. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 identifies that the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interrupt processing. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball number command in the interrupt processing at the time of reception. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the number of prize balls is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid quantity counter.

FIG. 21-25 shows the ball lending executed between the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control), the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the communication process of. Here, as will be described later, as a method of restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method shown below.

First, (1) The first ball lending restriction method is a payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer) from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). Further, (2) the second ball lending restriction method is a PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 equipped with the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, the output of the signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. Further, (4) the fourth ball lending restriction method is the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) to the card unit 21TM050 during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping the output of a signal.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, it may not be possible to pay out an appropriate amount of gaming media corresponding to the lending request. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, the ball lending in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is restricted. Hereinafter, the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described.

FIG. 21-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11 of the gaming machine, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal in the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on by the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 21-13 (see FIG. 21-19). When the power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as the connection signal.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 transmits the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and the card unit 21TM050 starts from the card unit 21TM050. When the falling edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period controlled by the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 21-27.

21-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 21-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode process is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controls the payout of the game medium. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 21-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 21-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the output of the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Second ball lending restriction method in the setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 21-28. In the example shown in FIGS. 21-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

21-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 21-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received). It is not in the state, but in the OFF state.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the player is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side does not receive the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on the resumption of reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 21-28 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 21-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To the OFF state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 21-29. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is said that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated as long as possible, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, the gaming machine frame 3 is usually open during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 21-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), and the card unit 21TM050.

The example of FIGS. 21-29 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even if it is electrically connected to 100), while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the period during which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but is turned off.

As a result, even if the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Since both the signal and the EXE signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball is played even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (payment of game media) is not executed.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). By detecting the open state of, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

Then, when the store clerk of the amusement park or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the clerk of the game hall closes the game machine frame 3 in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor. The 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 21-29 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 21-29 can be applied. That is, during the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used as the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 21-30. In the example shown in FIG. 21-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

FIG. 21-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIG. 21-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state based on the connection confirmation signal being in the ON state. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). When it is electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is turned on regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 causes the card unit 21TM050 to operate. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Here, the payout control board 21TM037 has the PRDY signal in the ON state and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal in the ON state, but has not received the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). The state of being electrically connected to 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (that is, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 is set even when the BRQ signal is ON (that is, a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the EXS signal is not turned on but is turned off. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the CPU 103 While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the ball lending (payment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side does not receive the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRQ signal when a predetermined time elapses (when the timer set to the predetermined value times out) while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON. To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the fact that the BRQ signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The XS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent payout control of the ball lending is executed.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 21-30 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when a different configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 21-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in FIG. 21-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even if a predetermined time elapses, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may also be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has resumed receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. The XS signal may be turned on based on the fact that all of them are in the ON state. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, the ball lending process according to the ball lending operation received within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed). (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and the ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute ball lending restriction during setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 21-31. In the example shown in FIGS. 21-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled by the setting change mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting change mode period. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the ON state is maintained even during the setting confirmation mode period. Shall be.

21-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the example of FIGS. 21-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication status with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal into the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and that the connection confirmation command is received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the VL signal (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, with the game control microcomputer 100). When the computer is electrically connected) and the connection confirmation command is being received, the PRDY signal is displayed regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 causes the card unit 21TM050 to operate. The BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control board 21TM037 has an EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. When the BRQ signal falling (OFF) from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, so that the connection confirmation command is continuously received. The PRDY signal and the EXE signal are turned on on the control microcomputer 21TM370 side. In this way, even during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the game medium can be executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be set. It is possible to reduce the control burden for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period. In addition, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to check the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same time, which can improve workability. it can.

The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on the fact that the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 is continuously received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal ON state when the payout operation is possible.

When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXS signal. .. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Further, when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is finished and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout control board 21TM037 stops the output of the EXE signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops the output of the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. As described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly.

(How to resume ball lending after the setting change mode ends)
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on thereafter, FIG. 21-32 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In the example shown in FIGS. 21-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the fact that the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, and after the power is turned on, the mode is controlled and set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Resume the withdrawal that was suspended after the end of the change mode or setting confirmation mode.

21-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 21-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode process is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 21-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, the payout control is performed based on the fact that the power supply is restarted and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is terminated (the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the PRDY signal is in the ON state). The payout microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. Perform payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium, which has been interrupted due to the power off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the setting is set even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of the subsequent power restoration. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 21-32, the payout process is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is used. An example was shown in which the suspended payout process is resumed after the end of the operation, but this power off is caused by the clerk of the amusement park turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power cut that occurs, or it may be a power cut that occurs when the power switch 21TM055 is turned off when the amusement park is closed. Further, not only when the power is cut off, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 during the payout process, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Depending on the state detected, the payout process that is being executed is interrupted, and then it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the interrupted payout process is performed. It may be restarted.

(How to forcibly terminate ball lending due to power failure)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) when the power supply is cut off while the ball lending is being executed and the payout is not restarted after the power supply is restored is specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIGS. 21-33, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, the payout is stopped. The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

21-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly terminates (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid quantity data is not stored in the unpaid quantity storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid quantity storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not paid out.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 21-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state, so that the CPU 103 changes the setting. While the mode or setting confirmation mode process is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

Based on the fact that when the CPU 103 ends the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 21-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, the predetermined number to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode due to the power restoration). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid pieces that were not paid out due to the cancellation (forced termination) of the payout is paid out. Not done. In this way, if the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled), and then when the power is restored, the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode or the setting By not executing the payout for the number of unpaid pieces after the confirmation mode ends, the control of backing up the data of the number of unpaid pieces and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

In the example shown in FIGS. 21-33, when the power is cut off during payout, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not backed up, so that the payout during execution is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle. Not limited to such a form, as in the example shown in FIGS. 21-32, when the power is cut off, the data of the number of unpaid data is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode On condition that it is not controlled by any of them, the game medium equivalent to the unpaid number is paid out based on the backed up unpaid number data (the payout is restarted based on the backup data), while after the power is restored. When controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game medium equivalent to the number of unpaid pieces is not paid out (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not completed. It is also possible not to pay out the game medium equivalent to the number of payouts.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 21-33 can be applied. Further, it is possible to output (turn on) the PRDY signal regardless of whether or not the connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in the ON state or the OFF state). Even when the above configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 21-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout control)
FIG. 21-34 is a timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 21-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time.

Although not shown, there is a prize during execution of the connection confirmation communication process (between the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and issues the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and pays out the prize balls (prize ball payout operation). When finished, the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(No prizes in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 21-35 is a timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process.

As described above, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the first general winning port switch to the fourth until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 21-13. The switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIGS. 21-14) for confirming the status (presence / absence of detection signal) of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like is not executed. The process (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 21-14) and the like are not executed either. Therefore, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the detection signal output from each switch is not detected, and the big hit determination process or the like is not executed. That is, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch processing is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the base aggregation is not executed. That is, until the interrupt permission is executed, it is not necessary to aggregate each item such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Therefore, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, each item is used. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 outside the aggregation period of.

During the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 invalidates the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening by not executing the switch processing and the special symbol process processing. And. That is, the prize ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the jackpot determination process or the like is not executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100 has not been received. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball payout control is not executed.

When the CPU 103 finishes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 It is possible to execute switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence or absence of detection signal), it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening, and it is possible to send a prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. In addition, special symbol process processing including jackpot determination processing can be executed.

The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that receives the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning openings (when winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing the switch process, and the game control microcomputer 100 serves as a prize ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which transmits the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out the game medium. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the switch processing is executed within the setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, the big hit judgment random number is extracted, and the big hit judgment is executed based on the big hit judgment random number. And, the set value before the change will be a big hit, but the set value after the change (the set value after confirmation) will not be a big hit. The set value of is not a big hit, but the changed set value (set value after confirmation) may be a big hit. In some cases, the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number. That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the game hall may suffer a disadvantage.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, the prize ball is not paid out based on the passing of the game ball through each winning opening, and the jackpot determination process is not executed, so that the jackpot determination is performed. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the game field is prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is invalidated and the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. Assuming that the setting confirmation mode is different from the setting change mode, it can be controlled not when the power is turned on but when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode is also switch processing. If the special symbol process processing can be executed, a control completely different from the setting change mode is required, which causes a problem that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on as in the setting change mode, and the prize ball is not paid out based on the passing of the game ball through each winning opening, and the jackpot determination is made. By not executing the processing, the processing is standardized and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21-12 and 21-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). .. Therefore, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The prize in is invalidated. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, etc., is the game stop error occurring during the period during which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game? When it is determined whether or not (step S21TM1615) and a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step) in the same interrupt processing. Since S21TM1690) is not executed, the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs depending on whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the game stop error occurs.

By stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit the connection OK command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 sends the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the prize ball number command of, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed. It is possible to invalidate the prize.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed). .. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 21-35 can be applied, and the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , Switch processing and special symbol process processing should not be executed.

Further, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute switch processing when controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning opening). May be. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped to control the payout. The microcomputer 21TM370 is not allowed to execute the payout control, the winning is invalidated, and the special symbol process processing is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is restarted in a state in which the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Pachinko machine frame / door frame opening detection method)
FIG. 21-36 is a timing diagram showing transmission / reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during detection of opening of the game machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. Receive the connection OK command as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected.

In the state where the game machine frame 3 is open (and the glass door frame 3a is open if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down and the upper plate on which the prize balls that have flowed down are stored are not physically connected, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it. Here, with the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a open, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any of the winning openings, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but for the game machine. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is issued to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

In this way, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the gaming medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 still uses the payout motor 21TM289. The prize ball payout control is not executed without driving. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Drive and execute control of payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. .. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

If the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize ball and the prize ball is paid out. Of the number specified by the number command, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven and the payout control of the game medium corresponding to the unpaid number is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

During the game (when the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated to control the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during detection of opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 21-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is said to be impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and the game is played during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The machine frame 3 is usually open. During the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted from being driven so that the prize balls are not paid out. As a result, the payout of prize balls is restricted during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode.

Next, control when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-37 (1) and (2).

21-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power outage in separate charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power outage. The pattern related to the power failure shown in FIG. 21-37 (1) shows the control when the power is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is not confirmed" is not performed while the "setting value is being changed", and the power is turned off and restored. The set value at the time is the set value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the pattern related to the power failure shown in FIG. 21-37 (2) shows the control when the power supply is cut off in the situation where the "setting value is confirmed" is performed while the "setting value is being changed". The set value at the time of power failure is the set value at the time of power failure.

That is, FIG. 21-37 (1) shows a setting when the power is cut off in a state where the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state and there is no “setting value confirmation” operation (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). The control regarding the value is shown, and FIG. 21-37 (2) shows the control regarding the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of "determine the set value" in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state. Shown.

Further, FIGS. 21-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the work of changing the settings from the upper row to the lower row in the order of occurrence (see "Order" column and "Status" column). ). Further, in FIGS. 21-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8) is shown in the "lock switch" column. In the "setting value" column, the setting value data (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. Further, in the "setting value display" column in the figure, the display contents (setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. There is.

When the setting change work is performed, as shown at the top of the "Status" column in FIG. 21-37 (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1), and the right side of the figure is on the right side. As shown in the column of "lock switch", the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is the ON state. Further, in FIG. 21-37 (1), the "set value" at the time of "power on" in order 1 is because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is "1". , "1".

Further, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the "set value display" column is blank at this stage because the power has just been turned on and the RAM 102 Since it is before the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is performed, it indicates that the display of the set value has not been started.

After the "power on" status, the "setting change mode start" status (order 2) is displayed. Then, in this "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. 21-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON", and the "setting value" column is RAM 102. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of is not changed, and the "setting value display" column is the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. It is set to "1" based on the fact that the setting value read from and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

Subsequently, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 3) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON" and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. , As shown in FIG. 21-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from "1" to "2", the column of "setting value display" (setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is displayed. It changes to the new selected value "2".

Furthermore, when the status of "setting value is being changed" (order 4) is reached, the "lock switch" column remains "ON", and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 21-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area. By changing the setting value stored in to "2" to "3", the "setting value display" column (setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. It changes to the new value "3".

Then, as shown in FIG. 21-37 (1), when the power is cut off during "changing the set value" (order 5), the operation of fixing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored. Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) has not been executed, the "set value" column remains "1". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of "1" when the power is turned on. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON and the power is turned on (order 6), then. In the "setting change mode start" situation (order 7), the setting value ("1" in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. , Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". The same applies when the order 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and when the power is cut off without completing the setting change operation (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value of the RAM 102 is set. Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is This is the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time (before the power is turned off). In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled.

Next, control when a power failure occurs after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power is cut off before the set value is confirmed will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is confirmed, the "set value is confirmed" shown in the order 5 is performed after the "setting value is being changed" shown in the order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is "1", and the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, in the setting change mode, the "lock switch" column is set to "OFF" based on turning the lock switch 21TM051 into the OFF state.

That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180) in the setting change mode, the setting value "1" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes the setting information temporary storage area. It is overwritten by "3" which is a stored set value (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)), whereby the set value is fixed (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

Then, when the power is cut off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the set value) is executed. The "set value" column is "3". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to "3", which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the subsequent “setting change mode start” status ( In order 8), the set value (“3” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is stored in the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The "set value" column is also "3", and the "set value display" column is also "3". The same applies when the order 8 is controlled not in the setting change mode but in the setting confirmation mode.

As described above, when the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled to the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. , The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, if the clerk of the amusement park mistakenly shifts the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further performs the setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by turning off the power switch 21TM055 after that, the change of the set value can be stopped and the state before shifting to the setting change mode can be returned.

The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. 21-37 (1), the power supply is performed without turning off the lock switch 21TM051. When a disconnection occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time the power is turned on, so that the set value can be set appropriately and the control regarding the set value is unstable. It is possible to avoid the change and execute appropriate control regarding the set value.

FIG. 21-38 shows the effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). (Image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and game effect lamp 9) shows an example in which notification that an operation for changing a set value has been performed is executed.

FIG. 21-38 (1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, while executing the variable display of the special symbol) (game control). The timer interrupt processing step S21TM1660) and the lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated are transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the timer interrupt processing for game control), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated The command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted in order to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

As shown in FIG. 21-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and the setting change mode and Even though it is not controlled by any of the setting confirmation modes, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 "detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch" as an abnormal operation warning notification based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display priority of the abnormal operation warning notification is higher than that of the background image and the decorative symbol (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol), the decoration is as shown in FIG. 21-38 (2). Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk of the game hall, etc., has performed an operation to change the set value even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly grasp and confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. In addition, a voice notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a voice saying "the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected") is output, and the game effect lamp 9 May emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that an operation for changing a set value has been detected.

In this embodiment, the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt processing is executed). Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. The operation for performing the operation (operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within the period during which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated during the period when the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or during the period when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the set value is about to be changed illegally.

In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Notifies that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed in the image display device 5, which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and performs fraud. I try to deter it.

Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and notifies that fact. Further, as described above, the ball lending is suspended or suspended, and the prize ball payout is also suspended or suspended. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is in an open state. Thereby, it is possible to see the back side surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch) on the back surface side thereof. Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position / Or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be able to be operated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is used regardless of whether or not the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. When it is operated, the deterrence of fraud is strengthened by notifying that the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value have been performed.

(Signal for setting change)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 21-39, the information output circuit 112 in the present embodiment is provided with 10 information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and signals corresponding to the respective information output terminals are output. Will be done.

In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 21-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-shaped signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 seconds. A game machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame / door frame open signal is turned on when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It turns on even when it is.

A signal for the number of times all symbols are confirmed is output from the third terminal. The all symbol confirmation count signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when confirmed), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when it is displayed (when it is confirmed), and the pulse width is 0.5 seconds. All start port signals are output from the fourth terminal. The all start port signals are pulse signals that are output when a game ball is won in the first start winning opening and are also output when a game ball is won in the second start winning opening. Yes, the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

One jackpot signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned on when the jackpot game state is controlled. Two jackpot signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is turned on when it is controlled in the jackpot gaming state, and is also turned on when it is controlled in the high base state. That is, the period during which the jackpot 1 signal is in the OFF state and the jackpot 2 signal is in the ON state can be specified as a high base state.

A setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls launched into the game area and guided to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. It is .1 second. A winning signal is output from the 9th terminal. The winning signal is sent every time a game ball wins a prize at each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st general winning opening to 4th general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). It is a pulsed signal that is output every time a prize is detected by the switch) and is output every time 10 prize balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

A security signal is output from the 10th terminal. The security signal is a signal that turns on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won), it is judged as an abnormal prize. In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the error of the game stop target, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 21-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. ..

In this way, the security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the 7th terminal, so that the possibility of fraudulent activity can be notified to the outside. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same 7th terminal. Since the number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-40 (1), when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 10th terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clearing, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 21-40 (1). Similarly, even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

If the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal will be ON for 30 seconds from the time the power is turned on, but the setting change compatible signal. Is not turned on.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The setting change compatible signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is parity in the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode) based on the RAM clear being executed. Even after the check result is not normal), it remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side where the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is recognizable that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal input period reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If it is recognizable by the device and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, it is possible for the management device to recognize that it may have been temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is input. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side depending on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, the possibility that the RAM clear is executed and the possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled can be recognized separately.

As shown in FIG. 21-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. In this configuration, a security signal is output during the period controlled in the setting change mode, but no security signal is output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and a period controlled in the setting change mode. Includes a configuration that does not output a security signal and does not output a security signal even during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, when the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is maintained in the OFF state based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

In this way, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 21-40 (5). In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is turned ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period controlled by the setting change mode. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the 7th terminal, but the security signal is not output from the 10th terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration where the security signal is not output during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, when the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

In this way, during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is turned off, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is in the OFF state), when one signal is in the ON state, the other signal is in the OFF state. It becomes a relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21-40 (6), when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game is completed based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 21-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal and the security signal is output from the 10th terminal. It may be difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to a signal that supports setting changes due to restrictions on the allocation of. In the example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 21-39 (2), an example in which a setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output is shown.

In the pattern 2, the first terminal to the sixth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In the pattern 2, unlike the pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when it is controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the 10th terminal. The security signal is a signal that turns on for 30 seconds when the initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when fraudulent activity is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. When fraudulent activity is detected, for example, an abnormal winning case is included, and each winning opening has an abnormal frequency (for example, a game ball is played at the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (such as when a prize is won), it is judged as an abnormal prize. In addition, the case where a switch abnormality detection occurs is also included, and the period during which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times or more continuously. 1 It is determined that the switch abnormality is detected based on (such as when the start port switch is in the ON state). When abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the error of the game stop target, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it will be ON for 4 minutes.

Further, in the example of FIG. 21-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period controlled by the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse shape (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the set value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change corresponding signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from the common terminal.

By being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal in this way, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility of fraudulent activity, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. It is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the mode has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change may have been executed). In addition, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is temporarily turned off (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The signal output from the 10th terminal turns off 30 seconds after the end), and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change correspondence signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change corresponding signal in the management device. By displaying in association with the preset value determined in advance, it is possible to perform a process of displaying in a contrastable manner. As a result, the manager of the game store can easily manage the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the settings changed in the setting change work. The administrator can understand the inconsistency with the value. When such inconsistency occurs, it is possible to optimize the management of the settings of a plurality of gaming machines in the gaming store by confirming the settings of the gaming machine or changing the settings again. it can.

As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off when the setting change mode ends and the setting confirmation mode ends, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. It is output in a special mode. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as a signal corresponding to the setting change of the special mode. In this example, the same number of pulses as the number of set values are output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 seconds. For example, when the set value is 3, pulses having a width of 0.1 seconds are output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

As shown in FIG. 21-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on as the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode is completed without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, but based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 1, the setting change corresponding signal of a special mode is used. 1 pulse is output as.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed). It is possible to notify the outside of the changed setting value), and the signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and the signal notifying the setting value are output from the common information output terminal. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a setting change corresponding signal of the special mode at a predetermined predetermined trigger. To. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of prize balls paid out by 1000. At that time (predetermined event), triggered by an event related to the game machine error, such as the detection of the opening of the game machine frame 3, the detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3a, or the detection of a magnetic abnormality. (When it occurs), a signal corresponding to the setting change in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 21-42 (1), a pulse of 1 is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

This makes it possible to secure an opportunity for the external device to grasp the set value of each gaming machine. For example, the external device may not properly input the setting change corresponding signal at the end of the setting change mode. Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined opportunity thereafter, and the prevention of fraud in which the set value is changed by an inappropriate method can be strengthened.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on because the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, as a result of changing the set value in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode, and the setting change is supported based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 3. 3 pulses are output as a signal. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-42 (2), 3 pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 21-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 21-41 (2), an operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was performed while the setting change mode was controlled, and the set value was changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, the number of pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. There is. In this way, when the setting change mode is controlled, a common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. , Signal output processing can be simplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on because the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Since the set value is not changed in the setting confirmation mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1. In this case, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change corresponding signal is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. 1 pulse is output as. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (the setting value of the RAM 102 is stored when the power is turned on). It is possible to notify the outside of the setting value (the setting value stored in the area and displayed on the display monitor 21TM029), and the signal notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value. It is possible to output a signal notifying the above from a common information output terminal.

In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 21-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. , It is turned off 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode). ) Setting change correspondence signal will be output.

(Modification example of game control main processing)
Next, other modes related to the game control main processing of FIGS. 21-11 to 21-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 21-43 and 21-44. 21-11 to 21-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As shown in 43 and FIGS. 21-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 21-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to the accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to the step S21TM2110 of FIG. 21-43 and clears input via the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

When the ON state is detected in the status check of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 has the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. The RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and the initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). The series of processes associated with the initialization process (processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM14010 to S21TM1460 shown in FIGS. 21-13, and description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the OFF state is detected in the status confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110 (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processes after step S21TM2120. To do. The process shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1320 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG. 21-13, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at the time of power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIGS. 21-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Step S21TM2320).

When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing status is controlled to the setting change mode based on the setting change mode. The processes shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200 in FIG. 21-12, and the description thereof will be omitted. Then, after executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

If the RAM clear flag is not set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 confirms the setting so that the set value can be confirmed. The mode shifts to (step S21TM251-10 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing status is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The process shown in step S21TM251-10 to step S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the process shown in step S21TM121-10 to step S21TM1240 in FIG. 21-12, and the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is assumed that NO is determined in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIGS. 21-43, and the initialization process (step S21TM2220 or later). The RAM clear flag is not set even when the process of) is executed. As a result, it is determined as NO in step S21TM2320, and the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. In this way, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Is not controlled in the setting change mode.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, a series of processes related to steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in steps S21TM1470 to 1470 shown in FIGS. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 21-43 and 21-44, when the setting change mode is controlled, the CPU 103 transmits a power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270) and then a setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) Is transmitted, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). When controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at the time of power failure recovery or an initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step). S21TM2520) is transmitted, and a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by an effect device such as 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by an effect device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving the setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since it is possible to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended on the effect control CPU 120 side, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Another variant of the feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear), but the setting value is not limited to such a form. The switch for changing is provided on the main board 11 (the operation can be detected by the game control microcomputer 100), and is different from the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). It may be. With such a configuration, the positions of the switch for switching the set value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) are compared with the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. When changing the set value, the confirmation of the set value and the switching operation according to the confirmation of the set value become easy, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game information such as the base is displayed is shown. Not limited to such a form, a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total game status, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying a set value, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be grasped individually and more clearly, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

Further, while a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, a switch for changing the set value may not be provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when the setting change mode is controlled (for example,). (Change every 5 seconds in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6), and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is stored in the setting value storage area (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value may be fixed by overwriting with the set value. The clerk at the amusement park switched the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed was displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and was displayed at that time. The set value can be fixed as the set value of the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of winning, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It may be an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium is enclosed in the gaming machine and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. In this enclosed gaming machine, the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037 may include information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting change mode, it is within the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting value. Information indicating that an operation for changing the above has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like may be included. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer so that the hall computer can specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ..

In the above embodiment, the period is controlled by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, the setting change mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the like. However, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special are based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. may be used to notify that the setting change mode is controlled (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode), and the setting confirmation mode may be used. The first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, etc. notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled (for example, 7). The segment display may be made to emit light in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode). Further, the pachinko game machine 1 is instructed to display the number of rounds during the big hit game (round number display) and to instruct the player to launch the game ball into a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, these displays indicate that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. It may be made to emit light according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security is secured. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned off, but the setting change mode is not limited to this mode. Or, when the security signal is turned on when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and then the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. As a result, the security signal may be temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal may be turned on for a specific period (for example, 30 seconds). By adopting such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

Regarding the expectation degree suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) depends on the set value of the gaming machine (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the jackpot expectation degree. The selection ratio of) may be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation is low, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, in the case of 5 or 6), the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, in the case of 5 or 6). It is also possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2). With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high because the expectation suggestion effect with a number of black stars of 3 or more is executed. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. Further, even if the reach has a low expectation of a big hit, the player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform the effect. Since it can be expected that the set value is high, it is possible to improve the interest even when the jackpot expectation is low.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined number of bets, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player to play the game. When a player stops a symbol in response to an operation of a stop button, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, big) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the setting confirmation mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms of the feature 21TM]
Next, details regarding the above-mentioned feature unit 21TM and other forms will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the gaming machine frame is provided with a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side (for example, the left side when viewed from the player) in the left-right direction, and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each have a hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in the direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side to the outer frame is provided.

Further, the outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that serves as an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame made of synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape in which the center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The game board 2 is attached to the game machine frame 3 from the front. The gaming board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to come off from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which speakers 8L, 8R, a gaming effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

When a clerk at the game hall performs maintenance on the surface of the game board (for example, measures to clear the ball jam), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism portion (one end side) toward the front side like a door with the mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. In order for the clerk of the game hall to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame to the front side like a door with the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can identify that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal capable of identifying that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be recognized separately.

(Processing when power is turned on)
22-1 and 22-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIGS. 21-11 to 21-13, and FIGS. This is a process corresponding to the process shown in FIGS. 21-11 and 21-43 to 21-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 21-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the processes shown in FIG. 21-11) are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 22-1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 of FIG. 21-13 and step S21TM2130 of FIG. 21-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting changing flag is set when the process shifts to the setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a regular value, for example, 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer (before it is installed in the game hall), a value different from the above regular value (for example, 0) is stored in the set value storage area. There may be. Also, if the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 clears the area excluding the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized. Note that the notification that the game state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command. Upon receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of power supply restoration (step S21TM3045). The process proceeds to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the restoration from the power failure has been performed based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, the effect device recovers from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify that.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. , The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, for the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 22-2. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step). S21TM3030 YES), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070), and the set value is changed and / or It becomes possible to confirm, and the process proceeds to the normal game process on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070). ..

In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (1) 2) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), further, on the condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) in step S21TM3040 (3). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, it shifts to the normal game processing. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the normal game process. With the transition to the normal game processing, the processing corresponding to steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 21-13 or steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 21-44 can be executed, and FIG. 21-14 shows. The indicated game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process, etc. can be executed).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if a regular value (1 to 6) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, step S21TM3110 is executed. The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), the CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), The setting value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM3010), if the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area. , 0 is set as the setting value, and the setting value error error command is transmitted.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value error error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal (for example, displays a message "The set value is abnormal"). To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the set value should be changed (for example, displays a message "Please change the set value"). The speakers 8L and 8R may be used to notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, a voice saying "the set value is abnormal" is output), and the set value is changed. It is also possible to notify that the state should be (for example, output a voice saying "Please change the set value").

When the CPU 103 transmits the set value abnormality error command, it confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), the CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3150, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value Is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each of these set values is not cleared. The aggregated value is unchanged from before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized.

Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 22-2. Move to. The backup command (step S21TM3045) at the time of power-off recovery and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) at the time of power-on are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it is possible to identify that the power-on commands have been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , The command transmission flag may be cleared when the process shifts to the normal game process (step S21TM1470 to). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command at the time of power failure recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on). If either YES is determined in step S21TM3020) or the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing, it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by clearing the RAM (step S21TM3150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to be in a state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is temporarily turned off and the next power is turned on (1) to (3). All the conditions of are satisfied, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command to notify the effect control CPU 120 that the power supply should be turned off. You may try to do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters "Please turn off the power") prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. .. Further, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 22-2. In the process of FIG. 22-2, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may have been changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the CPU 103 is set to specify that the setting change mode has been controlled. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and moves to step S21TM3520. Transition.

Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM3600) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag is flagged. Is still 0).

Further, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current set value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM3600). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). It is controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM3530, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating the set value stored in the set value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and the power is cut off during the setting change. It is determined that there is no (NO in step S21TM3020) and the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030), and further, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). Since NO) and RAM clear (step S21TM3050) have not been executed, it is sufficient to execute the normal process at the time of power restoration, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. When it is confirmed that this (NO in step S21TM3060), the normal game processing may be started.

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), it means that the RAM clear was executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. If the regular set value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area before (before it is determined as YES in step S21TM3530) (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0). (When the operation of changing the set value is not performed, etc.), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set value (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on processing again, and executes the processing after step S21TM3010.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control and initialize the game state and the like (execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, and RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

In the control shown in FIG. 22-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the state of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting to be opened. At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 operates a command for instructing the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a to be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 to confirm the setting change mode or the setting. A command instructing the user to notify that the mode should be terminated may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Then, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received these commands, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 is pressed. Notify that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode should be terminated by operation. For example, the image display device 5 may display the message "Open the gaming machine frame 3 and set the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state to end the setting change mode."

Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) lock switch 21TM051 A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the operation (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (2) Clear switch) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the game control microcomputer 100 sends a setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is set based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to identify that the operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

FIG. 22-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When controlled to the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is used as shown in FIG. 22-3 (1). Is displayed with the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

Every time the clerk of the amusement park operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the normal setting value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

In this way, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding to this. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the normal value is stored in the setting value storage area and prompt the setting change operation. If a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area and the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the manager of the amusement park May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to any of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, information different from the number (alphabet E in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. , We prevent such misunderstandings and make sure that the setting change operation is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, if a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area. , The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029, but after that, if the setting change operation is performed even once and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, then In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value during the period controlled by the setting change mode (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). This is done, and a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is not stored in the set value storage area, and information different from the regular value (character E in this example) is also stored in the display monitor 21TM029. ) Is not displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled in the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 Then, the regular setting value (2 in this example) stored in the setting value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the normal setting value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, if the setting value initially stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed thereafter. During the period controlled to the setting change mode (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the set value is updated within the range of the regular set value, and the set value storage area is the normal value. Different values (0 in this example) are not stored, and information different from the regular values (character E in this example) is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

For example, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is set in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Therefore, after that, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the set value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played. become unable. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

In addition, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Restriction on ball lending based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, the ball lending restriction method when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 22-4. FIG. 22-4 shows the main board 11, when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), and the card unit 21TM050.

In the example of FIG. 22-4, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even in the state of being electrically connected to the 100), the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

As a result, the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, and while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since both the EXS signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (painment of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

In this way, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. It is designed not to be done. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Then, the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be used. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and also does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent payout control of the ball lending.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is not possible to operate the pachinko machine 1 unless the pachinko machine 1 is set to the open state, the game machine frame 3 must be set to the open state in order to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, the gaming machine frame 3 is usually open during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power on, the state of the gaming machine. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of gaming media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and judgment processing for that purpose are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes a computer.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is prevented from executing the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process are restricted during the period controlled by the setting change mode and the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. To. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control is realized for ball lending processing and prize ball processing.

In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period when the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the payout control, such as the inability to pay out an appropriate number of gaming media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the maintenance work of the gaming machine when the door is opened.

(Resuming ball lending after the open state detection is completed)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 22-5. In the example shown in FIG. 22-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the gaming medium is being paid out. , The payout of the gaming medium is interrupted, and the suspended payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (closed).

FIG. 22-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

When the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the gaming medium, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

During the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in the period of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, and EXE signal Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the game medium is not paid out.

When it is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). (When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

Then, based on the fact that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the PRDY signal is turned ON), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the above, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

Therefore, out of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power outage occurs (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is made. Since the payout is executed for the number of unpaid pieces that have not been paid out, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player.

(Ball lending process when power failure occurs (without shifting to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 22-6, the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is specified. To explain. In the example shown in FIG. 22-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the power failure occurring during the payout of the game medium, and the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is restarted.

FIG. 22-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processes after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 22-1 are executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-1.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period during which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not turned on.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the amusement hall usually removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is set, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the detection that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. ..

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the open states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is increased. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the gaming medium is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the withdrawal of the suspended game medium and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending process when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
FIG. 22-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 22-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is the game control microcomputer. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the clerk of the game hall initializes the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 by operating the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, and initializes the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both the RAM clear and the RAM clear will be executed.

Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 22-7 (2). Will be specifically described with reference to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 22-7 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 22-7 (2), when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Occasionally, the payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. do not.

FIG. 22-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. , Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out even if the unpaid number of data is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 22-2 are executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear process has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not turned on.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is still in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). The PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the opening states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. And.

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is used. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 has not been cleared in the microcomputer 21TM370 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the data of the unpaid number is obtained. The payout operation is performed one by one until it becomes 0. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the ball lending is completed. Is possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-7 (2), when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. In the case), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining number to be paid out). Even when the PRDY signal is turned on (because there is no game medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid quantity stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized, so that the data is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode before the power is cut off (when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed in (previous) (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number has not been paid out. No payouts will be made for the number of payouts.

Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the number of unpaid items stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is accompanied by the execution. Is initialized, so that it is possible to simplify the management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the unpaid number of data is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the number of unpaid items is not paid out during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

(Modified example of ball lending process (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 22-8 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 22-8 (1), the above-mentioned clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with independent clear switches.

When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

When the game hall clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. 21TM052a is in the OFF state. On the contrary, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized without initializing the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off and cleared when the power is turned on. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on when the power is turned on. And.

Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending execution and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, FIG. 22-8 (2). Will be specifically described with reference to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 22-8 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the clear switch 21TM052a is set when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 22-8 (2), when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Occasionally, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished without restarting the payout. ..

FIG. 22-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXE signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. It is assumed that the BRDY signal from is in the ON state.

If a power failure occurs during the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. To. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal into the ON state but turns it into the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. The BRDY signal is not output to the board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 into the ON state, but maintains it in the OFF state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXE signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out even if the unpaid number of data is not cleared.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 22-2 are executed. When the RAM clearing process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clearing has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, turn on the PRDY signal. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. The PRDY signal is turned on on condition that the signal is not turned on.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of turning it ON, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is still in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The PRDY signal is turned off based on the above.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that the sensor 21TM300 has not detected any of the open states of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 22-8 (2), when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on (because of the existence of the medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. , The payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid pieces becomes 0. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power recovery, and the setting is also made. On condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the ball lending is completed. Is possible.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up in the RAM 21TM302. When the PRDY signal is turned ON because the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out). Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is paid out. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is displayed in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid numbers will not be initialized and will be executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid games that have not been paid out is , The payout will be executed.

Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid number stored in the RAM 21TM302 is not initialized, so that the ball can be rented. It is possible to appropriately protect the data of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, after a period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the unpaid number of payouts is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by turning the PRDY signal into the OFF state or by not turning the EXS signal into the ON state. Prevent it from being done.

(Restriction on payout of prize balls based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of restricting the payout of prize balls when the glass door frame 3a is in the open state when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 22-9. FIG. 22-9 shows a game control microcomputer when the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram which shows the transmission / reception of the signal between the computer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 22-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the game machine frame 3 or the glass door. The open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state where the game machine frame 3 is open (and the glass door frame 3a is open if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated), the prize ball to be paid out. Since the path through which the prize balls flow down and the upper plate on which the prize balls that have flowed down are stored are not physically connected, if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without doing it.

In the example of FIG. 22-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming control is performed. The microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of the gaming medium for any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. The prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, the payout control of the game medium is not executed, and the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

In this way, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is the winning opening. Even if the winning is detected, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control of the prize ball without driving the payout motor 21TM289. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control of the game medium from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in order to make the pachinko game machine 1 playable, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be used. The provided gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, and also does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning within the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Resume paying out prize balls after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the prize ball is being paid out, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 22-10. In the example shown in FIG. 22-10, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state while the gaming medium is being paid out. , The payout of the gaming medium is interrupted, and the suspended payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (closed).

As shown in FIG. 22-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. During the period when the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is paid out, the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, and the game machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is provided. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the gaming medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The unpaid number is updated based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the unpaid number is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and issues a command for preparing a prize ball as a received ACK signal for game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The transmission is continued to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state is reached.

As described above, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Do not pay out the game medium. Then, the prize ball preparing command as the received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

When the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (game machine frame 3 or glass door). When it is detected that the open state of the frame 3a is finished), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Based on the contents of the stored unpaid number storage buffer, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed.

(Prize ball processing when a power failure occurs (without shifting to the setting change mode))
Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 22-11 is used. Will be explained concretely. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the power failure occurring during the payout of the game medium, and the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the suspended payout is resumed.

As shown in FIG. 22-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period during which the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, when initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processes after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. 22-1 are executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-1.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process to be the power-on process (after the power is turned on, the serial is shown in FIG. 22-1 without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). During the communication circuit setting process (period until the execution of the communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480)), since the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the payout of the game medium is maintained in the interrupted state.

As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 22-1 (step) During the period until S21TM1480) is executed), the game medium is not paid out.

When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. Do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the amusement hall usually removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a after confirming that the RAM clear has been executed. Since the closed state is set, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. The state is set and the payout of the game medium is not executed.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are added. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid pieces becomes 0. As a result, the payout of the gaming medium, which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game medium and complete the payout of the prize balls.

(Prize ball processing when power failure occurs (shift to setting change mode))
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 22-12 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 22-7 (1), by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 22-12, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. The payout is not restarted, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is not restarted based on the execution of the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

As shown in FIG. 22-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period during which the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. , Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode), which is the process when the power is turned on, is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. ) Is stopped, so that even if the data on the number of unpaid numbers is not cleared, the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 22-2 are executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear process has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 or later). In such a case, even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. It becomes a state.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is in the ON state of the connection confirmation signal (processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Let me.

In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control is used. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 has not been cleared in the microcomputer 21TM370 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes 0. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration. On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the prize ball is paid out. Is possible to complete.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-12, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). This is because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game medium to be paid out is (Because it does not exist), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid quantity stored in the payout quantity storage buffer is initialized. In this way, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized, so that the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode before the power is cut off (when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing executed in (previous) (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number has not been paid out. No payouts will be made for the number of payouts.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the unpaid number of data is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (cancelled) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the number of unpaid items is not paid out during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

(Modified example of prize ball processing (shift to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
Next, regarding the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring while the prize ball is being paid out and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 22-13 is shown. It will be specifically described using. In this example, as shown in FIG. 22-8 (1), the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the clear switch 21TM052a is set when the power is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 22-13, when the power is cut off during the payout of the game medium, the payout during execution is stopped, and when the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without restarting the payout, the payout is restarted based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 22-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted. Receives the connection OK command as. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 retransmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception time. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned connection confirmation communication process as long as the connection state is normal.

If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), the game The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. If a power failure occurs during the period during which the number of prize balls specified by this prize ball number command is being paid out, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is played. Suspend the withdrawal of media. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Here, the clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the game machine frame 3 in order to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (further, to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. Further, in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

After that, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes the power-on processing. In this example, the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

In the payout control board 21TM037, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is used to open the game machine frame 3. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

After that, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period during which the CPU 103 is executing a predetermined process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode), which is the process when the power is turned on, is controlled, and the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. ) Is stopped, so that even if the data on the number of unpaid numbers is not cleared, the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained. It will be.

After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 22-2 are executed. When the RAM clearing process in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is notified that the RAM clearing has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned ON. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes 0. I do. Here, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a when the connection confirmation signal is turned ON. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform the payout operation on condition that the payout motor 21TM289 is not used.

As described above, after the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 after the power is turned on. The period during which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The game medium is not paid out. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk at the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is still in the ON state (step S21TM1480 or later) after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. Based on the above, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

When the clerk of the game hall closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal ON and the game machine frame / door frame open. The sensor 21TM300 starts driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected in the open state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 22-8 (2), when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on). ), When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Even if there is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game to be paid out). (Because there is a medium), the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and one piece until the unpaid number data becomes 0. The payout operation is performed one by one. As a result, the gaming medium was interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Payment is completed. In this way, when the power is cut off during the payout of the prize balls and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the number of unpaid pieces is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration. On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the suspended game medium payout is resumed and the prize ball is paid out. Is possible to complete.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear targeting the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 backs up in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. Does not work.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, it is paid out. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is displayed in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. In this way, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. (Regardless of), if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid numbers will not be initialized and will be executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid games that have not been paid out is , The payout will be executed.

As shown above, when the payout is interrupted due to a power failure occurring during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data will be stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the suspended payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. That is, after the power is restored, after a period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the unpaid number of payouts is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (a detection signal in the open state is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball number command is not sent. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is no longer received, so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and signal for setting change)
As described above, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 21-39 (1), the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. With this security signal, as described above, it is possible to notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of fraudulent activity, the detection of the game stop target error, and the like have been performed. Further, for the security signal, from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, FIGS. 22-1 and 22-1). It is turned on during the period from step S21TM3510 shown in 22-2 until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed).

Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 21-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal starts from the start of the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game processing (for example, FIGS. 22-1 and 2). It is turned on during the period from step S21TM3510 shown in 22-2 until it is determined as NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed). By this setting change correspondence signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the processing related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when shifting to the normal game processing), the setting change corresponding signal output from the 7th terminal is once turned off, and then from the same 7th terminal, the RAM 102 Since the number of pulsed setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-14 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode accompanied by RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 22-1) when the power is turned on, A setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the normal game processing is started. In addition, with the end of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms have passed since the setting change mode ended and the normal game processing was started), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 being 2, a pulse of 2 is output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special aspect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-14 (2), although the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 22-1) was executed when the power was turned on, the mode did not shift to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

In this way, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the mode may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIGS. 22-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. (To be exact, 50 ms has passed since the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode was completed and the normal game processing was started). The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is started, but as shown in FIG. 22-15 (3), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed. The OFF state is not immediately turned off after the setting change mode is finished, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode is finished. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, the OFF state is set (at the timing when 50 ms have elapsed since the transition to the normal game processing).

Further, in any of FIGS. 22-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (to be exact, the setting change). The setting value of the RAM 102 is stored after 50 ms has elapsed from the end of the mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, after 50 ms or more have elapsed). Based on the setting value stored in the area being 2, 2 pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal of a special aspect. As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the setting change mode is not entered, the security signal is sent when the power is turned on (RAM). It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds from (when clearing is executed).

Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. It is recognizable that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, it is highly possible that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode with RAM clear). If the security signal input period does not reach 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed and the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that (there is a possibility that only confirmation was performed without changing the set value).

That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may have been executed, but the setting change mode may not have been entered. If it is recognizable by the management device of the above and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the setting confirmation mode is entered without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that (there is a possibility that only confirmation was performed without changing the set value) and the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds. , The management device can recognize that there is a possibility of shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (particularly, there is a high possibility of shifting to the setting change mode accompanied by clearing the RAM). In this way, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the external side depending on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the processing based on the setting change corresponding signal input is not executed, it is at least based on the security signal input. Therefore, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been controlled and the possibility of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be recognized separately.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on, so that RAM clear is always executed (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is about the period controlled by the setting change mode + about 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state and the RAM clear flag is in the 0 state (YES in step S21TM3570) when the power is turned on. RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode (more accurately, the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

In this way, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal output period is different, so that each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish whether it is controlled by the mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished (to be exact, the setting change mode). Alternatively, the OFF state is set (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. In addition, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds longer than the input period of the signal corresponding to the setting change, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and the RAM has been cleared accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without clearing the RAM.

In this way, the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal are output from different output terminals, and on the external device side to which these signals are input, a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) is performed in the gaming machine. Can be identified by distinguishing between the occurrence of the above and the fact that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and whether the control period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified based on the input period of the security signal.

Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the setting was confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode ends because the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off within 50 ms after the mode is entered and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM3510). Then, it is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the 7th terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the 10th terminal. Is output. Then, less than 50 ms after the setting confirmation mode is started, even if the setting confirmation mode ends (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off) and the normal game processing is started, the period is at least 50 ms or more. The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

If the period during which the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are ON is less than the predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as the hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been changed. By turning on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode as in the present embodiment. On the external device side, it is possible to recognize that each pachinko gaming machine 1 has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Regarding the setting change compatible signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change compatible signal is output in a special mode with a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine is output on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after being turned on, and then the set value is set. When the configuration is such that the number of pulses with a width of 100 ms corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms). The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneous by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) that cannot be recognized and is output after that. There is a risk of recognizing it. Regardless of the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode as in the present embodiment, at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on to the external device side. Then, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

FIG. 22-16 is a diagram showing another example of the effect device included in the effect control board 12. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 2, the lamp control board 14 has the game effect lamp 9, the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101, the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102, and the fourth symbol indicator. The 21TM103 and the setting change status indicator 21TM104 are connected to each other, and both of them are composed of a light emitting device such as an LED. Further, all of these light emitting devices are provided outside the screen frame of the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of these light emitting devices via the lamp control board 14. In this example, it is assumed that all of these light emitting devices emit light in a common light emitting color.

The off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 has a change in the first reserved storage number, that is, when a prize is generated in the first start winning opening (when the first reserved storage number increases), and the first special symbol. When the display result is confirmed after the variable display of the above is completed (when the first reserved storage number decreases), the first reserved storage number for which the updated first reserved storage number is specified from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen first hold display 21TM101 is made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the first hold storage number designated by the first hold storage number designation command.

For example, when the first hold storage number specified by the first hold storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the first reserved storage number specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the number of first reserved storages specified by the first reserved storage number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is set to the blinking state and the other light emitting device is set to the lighting state. Then, when the first hold storage number specified by the first hold storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

The off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is composed of two light emitting devices. The effect control CPU 120 has a change in the second reserved storage number, that is, when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening (when the second reserved storage number increases), and a second special symbol. When the display result is confirmed after the variable display of the above is completed (when the second reserved storage number decreases), the second reserved storage number for which the updated second reserved storage number is specified from the game control microcomputer 100. When the designated command is received, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102 is made to emit light in a manner corresponding to the second hold storage number designated by the second hold storage number designation command.

For example, when the second hold storage number specified by the second hold storage number designation command is 1, one light emitting device is turned on and the other light emitting device is turned off. Further, when the second reserved storage number specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 2, both light emitting devices are turned on. When the number of second reserved storages specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 3, one light emitting device is set to the blinking state and the other light emitting device is set to the lighting state. Then, when the second reserved storage number specified by the second reserved storage number designation command is 4, both light emitting devices are made to blink.

The fourth symbol display 21TM103 is composed of two light emitting devices. Here, one of the light emitting devices is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A on the main board 11 side, and blinks at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started (that is,). (Variation display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the light is turned off or turned on (that is, the variation display is completed), and the display result is derived. The other light emitting device is a fourth symbol variation display device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B on the main board 11 side, and blinks (that is, fluctuates) at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is started. (Display) is started, and at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, the light-off state or the lighting state is set (that is, the variation display is completed), and the display result is derived.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a first hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the first hold storage number has been subtracted when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a display result designation that specifies a display result. The variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the reception of a set of commands, that is, a command and a variation pattern command for specifying the variation time of the special symbol, from the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the first special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the first special symbol is used. It is possible to identify that the variable display of is completed and the display result is derived.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, one of the light emitting devices in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, one of the light emitting devices is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is confirmed) according to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command. ). For example, when the display result of "missing" was specified by the display result specification command, one of the light emitting devices was turned off during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result of "big hit" was specified by the display result specification command. In that case, one of the light emitting devices is turned on during the symbol determination period.

The effect control CPU 120 receives a second hold storage number subtraction specification command that specifies that the second hold storage number has been subtracted when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a display result designation that specifies the display result. The second special symbol variation display is executed based on the reception of a set of commands, a command and a variation pattern command for specifying the variation time of the special symbol, from the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be specified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed, and the second special symbol is used. It is possible to identify that the variable display of is completed and the display result is derived.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the other light emitting device in the fourth symbol display 21TM103 blinks (that is, the variation display). Is started, and when the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command elapses, the other light emitting device is turned off or turned on (that is, the display result is confirmed) according to the reception of the symbol confirmation specification command. ). For example, when the display result specification command specified the display result of "off", the other light emitting device was turned off during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result specification command specified the display result of "big hit". In that case, the other light emitting device is turned on during the symbol determination period.

The emission color of the off-screen first hold indicator 21TM101 and the emission color of the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102 may be different. For example, the former may be emitted in blue and the latter may be emitted in red. You may let it. Further, in the fourth symbol display 21TM103, the emission color of one light emitting device corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A and the emission color of the other light emitting device corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B are made different. For example, the former may be made to emit blue light (the same emission color as the off-screen first hold display 21TM101), and the latter may be emitted in red (the same emission color as the off-screen second hold indicator 21TM102). You may do so.

Further, an image showing the first reserved storage number (for example, an image showing the blue number "0-4") and an image showing the second reserved storage number (for example, an image showing the red number "0-4") are displayed as images. It may be displayed on the display device 5. In addition, when the image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (for example, a square image, and the first special symbol is fluctuating and blinking (fluctuating) in white during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating, and the display result is out of alignment). Is an image that is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and if the display result is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed in red during the symbol confirmation period) and an image of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (for example, a square). The image is blinking (fluctuating) in yellow during the period when the second special symbol is fluctuating, and if the display result is off, it is stopped and displayed in blue during the symbol confirmation period, and the display result is a big hit. In this case, the image (the image stopped and displayed in red during the symbol determination period) may be displayed on the image display device 5.

The setting change status indicator 21TM104 is composed of one light emitting device. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting change status at the timing when it receives the setting change mode command (see step S21TM3585 in FIG. 22-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting change mode is controlled. Turn on the device 21TM104. Then, when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 22-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received when the control to the setting change mode is completed, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

The effect control CPU 120 changes the setting at the timing of receiving the setting confirmation mode command (see step S21TM3580 in FIG. 22-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The status indicator 21TM104 is blinked. Then, when the setting command (see step S21TM3720 in FIG. 22-2) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received when the control to the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is turned off. To do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is controlled to the setting change mode (lighting state) and the setting confirmation mode is controlled (blinking state) by the light emitting mode of the setting change status indicator 21TM104. It has become. Here, as compared with the period from when the power is turned on until the image display control in the image display device 5 becomes possible by the display control unit 123, the lamp control board 14 emits light from each light emitting device after the power is turned on. The period until control becomes possible is extremely short. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21-17, the period during which it is not possible to notify that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (image by the display control unit 123). Even during the period before display control becomes possible), it is possible to notify that the setting change status indicator 21TM104 is controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode according to the light emission mode of the setting change status display 21TM104. It will be possible.

On the effect control board 12, not only the setting change status display 21TM104 but also the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 are played. By emitting light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern at the time of operation, it may be notified that the setting change mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. For example, the setting change mode is controlled by turning on all the LEDs constituting the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103. The setting confirmation mode is controlled by notifying and setting all the LEDs constituting the off-screen first hold display 21TM101, the off-screen second hold display 21TM102, and the fourth symbol display 21TM103 in a blinking state. May be notified.

On the other hand, on the main board 11 side, during the period controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 performs the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the first special symbol. The display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20 are made to emit light in a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (for example, all are turned on at the same time). ), It is possible to notify that the setting change mode is controlled. Further, during the period controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 performs the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second. The special symbol display device 4B and the normal symbol display 20 are made to emit light with a light emission pattern different from the normal light emission pattern when the game is being performed (and a light emission pattern different from that when the setting change mode is controlled). (For example, by making all of them blink at the same time), it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

[Explanation of feature 30TM]
Next, the feature unit 30TM will be described. FIG. 23-1 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying the first hold storage number (0-4 first hold display 30TM001) and the second hold storage number (0-4 second hold) are displayed. A second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and an active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display are provided. The first reserved display area 30TM101, the second reserved display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen, and the active display area 30TM103 is in the center and the left side when viewed from the player is the first reserved display area 30TM101. The right side is the second hold display area 30TM102.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display 30TM001 in the first hold display area 30TM101 in a number corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 30TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

Further, when the second hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second hold display 30TM002 in the second hold display area 30TM102 in a number corresponding to the second hold storage number. That is, in the second hold display 30TM002, the start condition (for example, winning the second start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the second special symbol for which the second special symbol (the number of stored storages is not 0) is not established. When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, the second hold display 30TM002 corresponds to the order closer to the active display area 30TM103 (from left to right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 is a big hit game because the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

Further, in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (on the left side when viewed from the player), an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and the first hold storage number (sub-hold display 30TM004 of 0 to 4) is displayed. A sub-holding display area 30TM104 to be displayed and a sub-active display area 30TM105 that is different from the active display area 30TM103 and displays the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed are provided.

In the present embodiment, based on the determination that the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display 30TM004 at the time of start winning (when a prize is generated in the first start winning opening), the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is designated. The sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the number of 1-hold storage is displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, in the sub-hold display 30TM004, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved storage number is not 0) is not established. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 is controlled to the jackpot game state because the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved storage number is 0 and the first reserved stored number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-hold displays 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub-hold display 30TM004 is in the order closer to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (from the right when viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

Here, as shown in FIG. 23-1, the sub-hold display 30TM004 has a star-shaped contour, which is different from the first hold display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is smaller than that of the first hold display 30TM001, it is less noticeable and less visible to the player. Further, the sub-active display 30TM005 also has a star-shaped contour, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). Since the size of the sub-active display 30TM005 is smaller than that of the active display 30TM003, it is less noticeable and less visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 23-1, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the sub-active is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being executed in the image display device 5. The sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the display area 30TM105. As described above, as the information corresponding to the variable display (common variable display) of 1 being executed, the information of different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003, the variation display corresponding to the active display 30TM003, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variation display are displayed on the screen at the same time.

Further, corresponding to the first hold storage number being 4, four first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, and four sub hold displays are displayed in the sub hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. As described above, as the information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not been executed yet, information in different modes such as the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 is displayed. That is, the first hold display 30TM001 of 1 and the sub-hold display 30TM004 of 1 corresponding to the variable display (hold memory) corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 and the common variable display (hold memory) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

In this way, a plurality of types of hold displays (first hold display 30TM001, sub-hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common change display (variation display of the first special symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. It is possible to diversify the production using the hold display and improve the interest. Similarly, multiple types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the running variation display (variation display of the first special symbol, variation display of the decorative symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production using the active display and improve the interest.

Here, as will be described later, when it is decided not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the determination at the time of starting winning, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, while the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. Further, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the subactive display 30TM005 is not displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105, further indicating that the subactive display 30TM005 is an area to be displayed. The information (square frame shown at the top of the screen in FIG. 23-1) will not be displayed either.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect is a special mode in which the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white round display). (White triangle display in this example), blue mode (blue circle display in this example), green mode (green circle display in this example), red mode (red circle display in this example) Display) or a notice effect to be displayed in a golden mode (in this example, a golden round display). Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white star-shaped display) of the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. It is a notice effect to be displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star shape display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star shape display).

FIG. 23-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change effect determination process in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not a new command (1) reserved memory number addition designation command) has been received (step S30TM1010).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained among the winning judgment results and the judgment result of the type of big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and first hold storage number addition designation commands) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. To do. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on the determination that at least the first change effect is executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is.

If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, and whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It is determined based on the display mode determination table (see FIG. 23-3) (step S30TM1030).

By executing the processes of steps S30TM1010 and S30TM1020, in this embodiment, the processes after step S30TM1030 are executed only when the first change effect is not executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, it is configured so that the second change effect can be executed.

FIG. 23-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 23-3 (A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a "normal mode", a "special mode", a "blue mode", a "green mode", and a "red mode". It is possible to determine either "golden mode" or "golden mode", and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 23-3 (B), in this embodiment, the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is "no display", "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode". Any of these can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Of these, "no display" means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105.

As shown in FIG. 23-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 31% and the special mode (white circle display) at a rate of 4%. (Triangle display), 18% of the blue mode (blue circle display), 21% of the green mode (green circle display), and 16% of the red mode (red circle display). ), And it becomes a golden mode (golden circle display) at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode (white circle display) is 69. It will be executed at a rate of%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, and a green mode at a rate of 20%. It becomes a red aspect at a rate of 25% and a golden aspect at a rate of 35%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal mode is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

As described above, when the first change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than that when the first change effect is not executed. Further, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 23-3 (A), with respect to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold mode. ..

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect described later, at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003, the display mode is a special mode, a blue mode, or a red mode different from the normal mode. May be. Then, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when it is displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as or higher than that before the active shift. It is supposed to change to. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the degree of expectation of a big hit is in the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

As shown in FIG. 23-3 (A), the ratio of selecting the special mode as the final display mode of the active display is extremely lower than the ratio of selecting the other modes. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5, which will be described later, the proportion of the change pattern of the hold display including the special aspect is not so low as compared with the proportion of the other aspects. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the display mode changes at a higher rate than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. When the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the player cannot expect a big hit as compared with the case where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the blue mode or the red mode, but the display mode has a higher degree of expectation. It can be expected to change to the display mode (blue mode, red mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 70%, but are displayed at a rate of 30%. The ratio of the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) being displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio that the final display mode is the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 4%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 1%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting prize is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 5%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-3 (B), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the case is concerned. The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning prize (new first hold storage) are not displayed at a rate of 40%, but are displayed at a rate of 60%. The ratio of the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) displayed and the final display mode being the normal mode (white star-shaped display) is 25%, and the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed. The ratio of the final display mode to the blue mode (blue star-shaped display) is 10%, the sub-active display 30TM005 (sub-hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star-shaped display). The ratio is 25%. That is, the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting prize is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect, in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star-shaped display), is executed at a rate of 50%.

In this way, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than that when the second change effect is not executed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the red mode, the ratio of big hits is the highest. As shown in FIG. 23-3 (B), with respect to the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Further, as shown in the change pattern of the second change effect described later, when the display mode becomes a blue mode or a red mode different from the normal mode at the stage of the sub hold display 30TM004 prior to the sub active display 30TM005. There is. Then, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when it is displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as or higher than that before the active shift. It is designed to change in mode. Therefore, with respect to the display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004, the degree of expectation of a big hit has a relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is different from the normal mode), and the second It may be decided to execute the change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is decided to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided (as an aspect).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines (3) not to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a normal mode), and executes the second change effect (sub-hold display 30TM004 and). It may be determined that the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may decide not to execute (4-1) the first change effect, and may decide not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005. Further, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually set. It may be decided (as an aspect).

When the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute either the first change effect or the second change effect in the process of step S30TM1030 (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and ( If any of 4-2) is applicable, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold storage) is displayed in the normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started, this is displayed. The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the above does not change from the normal mode to the other mode (change patterns 101, 201, when the final display mode is the "normal mode" shown in FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5. (See 301, 401).

If the above (4-2) is applicable, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 23-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (1), (2-1) and (2). -2) and (3) are applicable, the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

When it is decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, when the above (1) is applicable, the first updated first in step S30TM1060. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of hold storages (the first number of hold storages after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 (). (See FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5), the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command), and the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode of (see FIG. 23-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 executes the first change effect and decides not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, in the above (2-1) and (2-2). If any of the above applies, in step S30TM1120, the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final determined active display 30TM003. The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5). If the above (2-2) is applicable, the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the subactive display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 23-6). , See change patterns 601, 701, 801 and 901 when the final display mode is the "normal mode").

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the second change effect without executing the first change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, when the above (3) is applicable, the step In S30TM1210, the second is based on the updated first hold storage number (first hold storage number after receiving the first hold storage number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined subactive display 30TM005. The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 23-6).

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of the above (1), (2-1) and (2-2), and (3)). If this is the case), a look-ahead counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). When neither the first change effect nor the second change effect notice effect is executed, but the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning prize (first hold memory) is displayed ((4-2) above). Also (if applicable), set the look-ahead counter.

The read-ahead counter is set with a value corresponding to the first reserved storage number updated based on the start winning prize (value specified by the first reserved storage number specification command), and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The value of the look-ahead counter is decremented by 1 each time (every time the first hold storage number subtraction specification command is received). That is, the value of the look-ahead counter is subtracted each time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the look-ahead counter becomes 0, the variation display (or the second change effect is not executed but the sub-hold display 30TM004) that is the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect is displayed. Variable display) will be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag when it is determined to execute the first change effect (step S30TM1080, step S30TM1140). During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it corresponds to the new start prize (new first hold memory) by determining YES in step S30TM1020 described above. Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start winning prize (new first hold memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display that is the target of the first change effect ends.

23-4 and 23-5 are explanatory views showing a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the first change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the nth first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (timing at the time of start winning), (ii) The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side) in the first hold display area 30TM101. Timing (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (Timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning is displayed). ), The display information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5, what kind of display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display is displayed at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. It indicates whether the display mode is adopted. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white round display is displayed, and "special" indicates a special mode in which a white triangular display is displayed. "Blue" indicates a blue aspect which is a blue round display, and "red" indicates a red aspect which is a red round display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 23-4 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 101 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of starting winning). The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the judgment target is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 102 A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, change pattern 401, which will be described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the special mode. Further, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 does not change in the special mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in a special mode at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 105 is a change pattern 105. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the blue mode after the active shift. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). In the case of (and 404), the active display 30TM003 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively.

Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the green mode after the active shift. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the green mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

Here, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the normal mode to the golden mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the mode is a special mode at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change patterns 302, and change patterns 402). ), The active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the special aspect to the golden aspect after the active shift. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change patterns 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 will eventually change from the blue mode to the golden mode. Further, when the golden mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is displayed at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, change pattern 405). In the case of ~ 412), the active display 30TM003 will finally change from the red mode to the golden mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 23-4 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 201 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 201, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be notified in the normal mode even at the timing.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is performed. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing, and the change pattern 203 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is special even at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively. The change pattern 205 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to a blue mode, and the change pattern 206 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the special mode and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. 1 After displaying the hold display in a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and in the change pattern 208, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing. In the change pattern 209, after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in a special mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode, and the change pattern 210 is a notice at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. 1 After displaying the hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 212 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of the start winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the red mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, change pattern 202, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212, respectively. ing.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 23-5 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 301 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 301, after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold display is not changed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 302. The change pattern 302 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301 Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. The change pattern 303 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the special mode at the timing of, but changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to the blue mode and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 305 changes the first hold display of the notice target to blue when the start prize is won. After displaying in the mode, the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. The change pattern 306 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the first hold display in blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 308 changes the first hold display of the notice target at the start winning. After displaying in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 309 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode, and the timing of the active shift. However, it is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode, and the change pattern 310 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. Does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode, does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode. 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the red mode.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and so on, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit) Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 23-5 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 401 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 401 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold display is not changed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, even at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display to be announced in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 402. The change pattern 402 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode even at the timing of the third hold shift, and the notice target is also at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the above in a special mode.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively. The change pattern 403 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is also changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that does not change the hold display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 404 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display to be notified is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift. 1 The hold display is not changed in the blue mode, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is not changed even at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode and does not change the first hold display to be announced in the blue mode even at the timing of the active shift.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively.

Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change pattern 405 to the change pattern 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 changes the first hold display of the notice target to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, but the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. 1 It is a change pattern that changes the hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 is a change pattern 406 that displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the first hold display of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The hold display is changed to a special mode, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing it as it is, and the change pattern 407 is after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. At the timing of the first hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, and the third hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the target first hold display in the blue mode, the first hold display of the target is not changed in the blue mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts, and the notice is given at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the target to the red mode, and the change pattern 409 is the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold shift after the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the red mode, and the change pattern 410 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. The display changes in blue mode Instead, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode even at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 411 changes the first hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red mode even at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 412 is the first notice target at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the red mode even at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the hold display is displayed in the red mode.

When the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), Judgment values are assigned to change pattern 403, change pattern 404, change pattern 405, change pattern 406, change pattern 407, change pattern 408, change pattern 409, change pattern 410, change pattern 411, and change pattern 412, respectively. ing.

FIG. 23-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the second change effect. When the first hold storage number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, and it is decided to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, (i). ) The 1st to nth sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the first hold storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is sub. The timing displayed in the active display area 30TM105 (timing at the time of starting prize), (ii) the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning is in a higher position in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (secondary active display area 30TM105). Timing to shift to (side) (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) Timing to shift the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the start winning to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (sub-active display corresponding to the start winning) At the timing when 30TM005 is displayed), the display information (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

In FIG. 23-6, what kind of display mode the display information (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display becomes at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 23-6, "normal" indicates a normal mode in which a white star is displayed, and "blue" indicates a blue mode in which a blue star is displayed. "Red" indicates a red aspect which is a red star-shaped display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "1", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one reserved storage shown in FIG. 23-6 (A). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 601 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

In the description of FIG. 23-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the fluctuation that is the judgment target at the time of starting winning). The sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are set according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 603 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change patterns 902, which will be described later). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the blue mode after the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 601 and the change pattern 602 are set according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 605 is the start. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift.

Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change pattern 601, change pattern 701, change pattern 801 and change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 will eventually change from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, and change patterns 902, which will be described later). In the case of ~ 905), the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue mode to the red mode after the active shift. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708, change patterns 805 to 808, and change patterns 906, which will be described later). In the case of ~ 912), the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in the red mode after the active shift.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved storages shown in FIG. 23-6 (B). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 701 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 701 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and also at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the normal mode.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, and the change pattern 701 are used according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the start winning, and at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode, and the change pattern 703 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display to the blue mode and does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift after displaying with.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, and the change pattern 701 are used according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change pattern 705 to the change pattern 708, respectively. In the change pattern 705, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the above to a red mode, and the change pattern 706 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-hold of the notice target at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the active shift without changing the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 707 is the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. After the display, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. 708 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the red mode at the time of starting winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the timing of the active shift. ..

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved storages shown in FIG. 23-6 (C). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 801 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. The change pattern 801 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of, and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 802 to change patterns 804. The change pattern 802 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of, and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is changed at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode, and the change pattern 804 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of starting winning, and then the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern 802 are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 806 is the sub-hold display of the notice target at the time of starting winning. Is displayed in the blue mode, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift without changing the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 807 is the first time after the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the red mode at the timing of the hold shift and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift and the timing of the active shift. The pattern 808 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved storages shown in FIG. 23-6 (D). Select a table.

When the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 901 is 100% is 100% regardless of the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned so as to be determined by. In the change pattern 901, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is.

When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is a loss or a big hit). Judgment values are assigned to each of the 902 to change patterns 905. In the change pattern 902, after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts, and the third time. It is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the hold shift of, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-hold of the notice target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes the display to the blue mode and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. After displaying the sub-hold display in the normal mode, the sub-hold display to be announced is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the notice target is set at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the above in the blue mode, and the change pattern 905 is the first, second, and third hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display to be announced in the blue mode at the timing and the timing of the active shift.

When the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905, depending on the judgment result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, which is out of order or a big hit), And, the determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 906 to the change pattern 912. The change pattern 906 does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and the second hold shift. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode at the timing of, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change as it is, and the change pattern 907 displays the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the sub-hold display of the notice target to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift. At the timing of the second hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode, but at the timing of the third hold shift, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode, and the active shift It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing, and the change pattern 908 is the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. The sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the notice target is changed at the timing of the third hold shift and the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display in the red mode, and the change pattern 909 is a notice target at the timing of the first and second hold shifts after displaying the sub-hold display to be notified in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. The sub-hold display of is not changed in the blue mode, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target remains in the red mode at the timing of the active shift. It is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 910 changes the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the time of starting winning. Instead, the sub-hold display of the notice target is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the sub-hold display of the notice target is not changed to the red mode at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 911 is a pattern, in which the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in blue at the start winning, and then the sub-hold display of the notice target is displayed in red at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern that changes to the mode and does not change the sub-hold display of the notice target in the red mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be announced is not changed in the red mode at the timing of the first, second, and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift after the sub-hold display is displayed in the red mode.

As shown in FIG. 23-3, the rate at which the first change effect of displaying the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is executed is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect is executed, in which is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-3, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

In this way, at the lower part of the screen, the player is able to perform the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003, which has high visibility, at a high frequency. Can sustain your interest. On the other hand, with respect to the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005, which have low visibility, the percentage of big hits differs depending on whether or not they are displayed at the top of the screen. Attention will be paid to whether or not the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Further, since the jackpot expectation when the second change effect is executed is higher than that of the first change effect, whether or not the display mode changes when the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed. Will also pay attention to.

Further, in the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the lower part of the screen and a star-shaped icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive) displayed at the upper part of the screen. The size and shape are different from the display 30TM005). That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed as a circle, and the other icon (secondary hold display 30TM004 or subactive display 30TM005) is displayed as a star. By doing so, the characteristics of each icon are clarified so that the player can easily grasp the difference (different types of display information). In addition, it is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production by the icon corresponding to the variable display.

In addition, a common display color corresponding to a common variable display, such as the relationship between the red-shaped first hold display 30TM001 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-shaped sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed at the top of the screen. Icons (however, the shapes are different for round and star) may be displayed at the same time. As a result, the variable display that is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variable display.

In addition, a common display color icon corresponding to the variable display during execution, such as the relationship between the red-shaped active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red-shaped sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen. (However, icons with different shapes for round and star) may be displayed at the same time. This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-4 to 23-6, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, the red aspect). The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red mode sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both hold display modes and displays the hold display. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-3, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the active display 30TM003 in the gold mode and the red mode. The combination of the sub-active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation of a big hit), so that the player becomes interested in both active display modes and enhances the interest of the production that changes the display mode of the active display. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 shifts to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the first change effect is displayed. (When displayed), the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited at the time of active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23-6, when the sub-hold display 30TM004 shifts to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (when the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variation display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is inherited during the active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. This makes it possible for the player to be interested in how the sub-hold display 30TM004 changes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23-3, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is provided with more display modes than the subactive display 30TM005 with low visibility. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23-4 to 23-6, the change pattern when changing the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility is when changing the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. It is provided more than the change pattern of. In this way, by differentiating the types and patterns of the effects that can be executed according to the visibility of the active display and the hold display, the first change effect and the second change effect and the second effect are prevented from becoming excessively complicated. We are trying to appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-7 to 23-9. FIG. 23-7 is a time chart when both the first change effect and the second change effect are executed, and FIGS. 23-8 and 23-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of execution.

First, FIG. 23-8 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 23-7 by displaying the variation of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 23-7), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect, and also displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display). A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the first hold storage number being 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) and 23-8 (2) of FIG. 23-7 based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. During the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, after the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 which is the target of the second change effect is displayed). From), the period until the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub-hold display 30TM004) is completed (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 23-7).

As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 23-7). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is deleted. , The sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 23-7). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to a special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (5), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 23-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is set to 1. The sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 23-7). Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display), and the first hold display is changed based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. The sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (7), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 23-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, at the same time. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) and the blue mode displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 are displayed. The sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display)) is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side one by one, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 23-7). Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, the first hold display is changed. The sub-hold display to be announced is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-9 (9), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-9 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 23-7). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed in is erased, and the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004c in red mode (red star-shaped display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is changed to the sub-active display area 30TM105. The shift display is performed, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Then, after the variation display targeted by the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted by the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 23-7, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103. The change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23-16. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggestion effect described later may be executed.

If the sub-active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the sub-active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105 within the period shown in T7 to T8 of FIG. 23-7. Change to the aspect. For example, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 determined at the time of starting winning is the red mode and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the blue mode immediately after the shift display, the variation display of the advance notice target is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23-9 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 23-7), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden, so that it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reach effect from being lowered and the interest being lowered. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variation display of the notice target is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 23-7).

As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, which share at least a part of the display area with the area where the reach effect is executed, are hidden. On the other hand, the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display, which are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, can be continuously displayed at the upper part of the screen even during the period when the reach effect is executed. , The player can see these. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of reserved memories even during the execution period of the reach effect, and can grasp the display modes of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-10 to 23-12. FIG. 23-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed, and FIGS. 23-11 and 23-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production image.

First, FIG. 23-11 (1) was started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 23-10 by displaying the variation of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. It shows the state in which the variable display) is being executed. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (2) (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 23-10), a new prize is won. It is assumed that a start winning prize is generated for the ball device 6A, and the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed (therefore, the second change effect is not executed). Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. Also, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in FIGS. 23-10 (T2) and 23-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning prize (first hold memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is from the time when the first hold display 30TM001 which is the target of the first change effect is displayed until the end of the variation display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001. The period (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 23-10) is used.

As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. Within the period, the first hold indication of the normal aspect does not change to another aspect (eg, a special aspect, a blue aspect, or a red aspect). Further, based on the change prohibition flag being set, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020 and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding sub-hold display 30TM004 and sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

Not limited to such a form, when a new start prize is generated within the prohibition period of the change effect, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode corresponding to the new start prize can be displayed. The display mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 is subject to advance notice by the first change effect. It is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 23-10). The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (4) (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 23-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to a special mode (first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (5), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 23-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one toward the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device. At 5, the next variation display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (6) (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 23-10). Therefore, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (7), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 23-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the image display device. At 5, the next variation display is started.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when the variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 23-11 (8) (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 23-10). Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-12 (9), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first, as shown in FIG. 23-12 (10) (timing of T6 shown in FIG. 23-10). The first hold display (first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in the red aspect) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and the following fluctuations are made in the image display device 5. Start displaying.

Then, after the variation display targeted by the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variation display targeted by the first change effect is displayed), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in the figure. Within the period shown in T7 to T8 of 23-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23-12 (11) (timing shown in T8 of FIG. 23-10), the same decorative symbol (“7” in this example) stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect in which the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the lower part of the screen, that is, the area overlapping the first reserved display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 is executed. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are hidden. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the variation display of the notice target is completed (until the timing shown in T9 of FIG. 23-10).

As shown above, if it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of the start prize, a new start prize will be awarded until the variation display that is the target of the first change effect is completed. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on the new start prize is not executed either. In this way, after the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is once changed in the first hold display area 30TM101 with high visibility (after the mode is changed from the normal mode), a new start winning prize is subsequently generated. Even in this case, by not executing the second change effect based on the new start prize in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is made to pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility. 1 It is designed to prevent the production from becoming complicated due to the execution of the second change effect targeting the variation display different from the variation display that is the target of the change effect.

In the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. An example of prohibiting the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is the normal mode). If a new start prize is generated during the period displayed in a different mode), the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but at that time. The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be made lower than before the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

In addition, if a new start prize occurs after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), other notices are not limited to the second change effect. The execution of the production may be restricted. For example, the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 each time the variable display is executed (for example, the first reserved storage number is changed from 3 to 0). It is possible not to execute the countdown effect (displayed as "3", "2", "1", "0" by subtracting 1 by 1). Further, the background change effect that changes the background image to a special mode may not be executed until the variation display based on the new start winning prize is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, if a new start prize is generated after the execution of the first change effect (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. An example is shown in which execution of both the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the start winning is prohibited, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after the execution of the first change effect (the first hold display 30TM001 is usually used). If a new start prize occurs during the period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but the new start prize is supported. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 itself corresponding to the new start prize is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is displayed, but the display mode is usually displayed. It may not be changed as it is).

(Modification example related to the first change effect and the second change effect)
In the above embodiment, the mode is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shift-displayed in the first change effect, and the mode is changed at the timing when the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shift-displayed in the second change effect. However, not limited to such a form, the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect that acts on the first hold display 30TM001, and acts on the sub-hold display 30TM004. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

23-13, 23-14, and 23-15 are specific examples in the case where the first holding action effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-holding action effect is executed in the second change effect.

First, FIG. 23-13 (1) shows a state in which the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. At this time, the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display 30TM001 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Are displayed. At this time, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the sub-active display 30TM005 is not displayed either. Further, the guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

Then, when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start winning prize that is the determination target (golden mode in this example). , And, when the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is decided to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning prize that is the judgment target is displayed. The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. Further, at this time, 4 is set as the value of the look-ahead counter based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4. That is, the value of the look-ahead counter indicates the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode in the sub-active display area 30TM105 based on the decision to execute the second change effect, and also displays the sub-active display 30TM005 (white star-shaped display). A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the first hold storage number being 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

In this example, since the first hold storage number is 4 based on the start winning, the fourth hold display 30TM001 and the sub-hold display area 30TM104 displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 The fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-13 (3), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-13 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103, and at the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the subhold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted and displayed one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

In this shift display, the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103, is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 in the normal mode, which was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105, is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. Will be.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from the normal mode to the special mode ( In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a), which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the first hold action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 23-13 (4), the character A appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 specializes the first hold display to be notified from the normal mode in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001a, which is a white triangle display) is changed. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 23-13 (6), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. While erasing the active display 30TM005, the sub-hold display (sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 one by one. Then, the image display device 5 starts the next variable display.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be announced during the execution of the variation display is changed from a special mode to a blue mode (a blue mode). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b), which is a blue round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect while the variation display is being executed. Then, it is recognized that the sub-hold display 30TM004b), which is a blue star-shaped display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 23-13 (7), the character B appears and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001a to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be notified in blue from a special aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect B). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b, which is a blue round display) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 23-14 (9), the character a appears, and an effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified is executed. As shown in FIGS. 23-14 (10) and 23-15 (11), the balloons blown by the character a fly toward the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified and reach the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004. It is possible to expect the player to change the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004 by displaying the image to be displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 23-14 (11) and (12), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image of the balloon being broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23-14 (13) and (14), the effect control CPU 120 normally displays the sub-hold display to be notified in response to the execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect a). To the blue mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004b, which is a blue star-shaped display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIGS. 23-14 (15), the image display device 5 ends the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the first hold display area 30TM101 is displayed. The hold display (first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) is shifted and displayed one by one to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. While erasing the active display 30TM005, the sub-hold display displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 (the sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star-shaped display) in the normal mode and the sub-hold display 30TM004b (blue star-shaped display) in the blue mode) is displayed. )) Are shifted one by one to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode during the execution of the variation display. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c), which is a red round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first hold action effect and the type (character type) of the first hold action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the variation display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect while the variation display is being executed. Then, it is recognized that the sub-hold display 30TM004c), which is a red star-shaped display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-holding action effect and the type (character type) of the sub-holding action effect to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 23-15 (17), the character C appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the first hold display 30TM001b to be announced is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can be expected to change the mode of the first hold display 30TM001b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display to be notified in red from the blue aspect in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect C). The mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001c, which is a red round display) is changed.

The effect control CPU 120 then executes the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) within the same fluctuation display period. In the example shown in FIG. 23-15 (19), a character b appears, and an effect of flying a balloon toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified is executed. As shown in FIGS. 23-15 (20) and 23-15 (21), the balloons blown by the character b fly toward the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified and reach the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b. It is possible to expect the player to change the mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004b by displaying the image to be displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 23-15 (21) and (22), when the balloon reaches the position of the sub-hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (sub-hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image of the balloon being broken (secondary hold display 30TM004G) is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-hold display to be notified in blue in response to the execution of the sub-hold action effect (action effect b). To the red mode (in this example, the sub-hold display 30TM004c, which is a red star-shaped display). ..

As described above, the effect mode is different between the first hold action effect executed when the mode of the first hold display is changed and the sub-hold action effect executed when the mode of the sub-hold display is changed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest due to the existence of a plurality of types of hold-corresponding displays (first hold display and sub-hold display).

As shown in FIGS. 23-13 to 23-15, the effect of the character appearing and taking an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed. Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed in response to the execution of the active action effect in which the character A appears and throws a ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). Further, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect is executed in response to the appearance of the character a and the action of flying a balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, there are a plurality of types due to the difference in the effect mode between the active action effect executed when the mode of the active display is changed and the sub-active action effect executed when the mode of the sub-active display is changed. It is possible to further improve the interest due to the existence of the variable display (active display and sub-active display).

In the above embodiment, the execution rate of the first change effect and the execution rate of the second change effect may be different depending on the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the ratio of the first hold display 30TM001 being displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). Further, the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio of the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 itself displayed) may be high. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger (for example, 3 times) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). ) The rate at which the change pattern is selected is high, and the rate at which the change pattern with a large number of changes in the display color of the sub-hold display 30TM004 (for example, twice) is selected may be high.

(Active change production and change suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated, but as described above, the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to perform a change suggestion effect that suggests that there is a possibility of change. This change suggestion effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed.

The effect control CPU 120 is different from the display mode of the active display at the time of the active shift and the final display mode of the active display determined when the start winning is generated when the active shift accompanying the start of the variable display is performed. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during the execution of the variation display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the period of the variation display.

In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern that changes the active display from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode when the variable display is started. FIG. 23-16 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of "○" in FIG. 23-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of "?" Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

When the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode as shown in FIG. 23-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 23-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the special mode. Judgment values are assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is two, of which one is a success mode and one is a failure mode. In the change pattern 011, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in a special mode.

When the final display mode is the blue mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 012, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the blue mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the blue mode. The change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the special mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 014, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the green mode. It is a change pattern, and the change pattern 015 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to a special mode, and then changes the change suggestion effect of the success mode. Is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to perform the active display. Is a change pattern that changes to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 016, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, a change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode. The change pattern 017 is a change suggestion effect of the success mode after displaying the active display in the normal mode at the time of active shift. To change the active display to a special mode, then execute a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a blue mode, and then execute a success mode change suggestion effect to turn the active display green. A change pattern in which the mode is changed, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode. Is.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is 5, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 018, after displaying the active display in the normal mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to a special mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the blue mode, then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the red mode. After that, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the golden mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is a special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 23-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 23-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the blue mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 021, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 021, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the blue mode.

When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 022, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the green mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025 is 4, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 024, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. The display is changed to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged from the red mode. The change pattern 025 is a change pattern, in which the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. Is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display unchanged in the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to perform the active display. Is a change pattern that changes the color to red.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is 4, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after displaying the active display in a special mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. A change that changes the display to a green mode, then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a red mode, and then executes a success mode change suggestion effect to change the active display to a gold mode. It is a pattern.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode as shown in FIG. 23-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 23-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the green mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed twice in the change pattern 031, of which the success mode is once and the failure mode is once. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern that does not change the display in the green mode.

When the final display mode is the red mode, the determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033 is 3, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 032, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. It is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed so that the active display does not change in the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in the blue mode during the active shift. Later, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern that executes a suggestion effect and changes the active display to a red mode.

Further, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of times the change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern 034 is 3, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in the blue mode during the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to be active. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

When the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode as shown in FIG. 23-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 23-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a 100% probability when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment values are assigned. The change suggestion effect is executed once in the change pattern 041, of which the success mode is 1 time and the failure mode is 0 times. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which the active display is displayed in the red mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the gold mode.

As shown in FIGS. 23-16, within one variation display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach is reached after the variation display is started. The more change suggestion effects are executed (within the period until the state is established), and in particular, the more success mode change suggestion effects are executed, the more the display color changes to a high hit expectation. The ratio will be high.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the nth change suggestion effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode up to that point, the higher the ratio of the n + 1th change suggestion effect being executed. It is configured as follows. For example, at the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed (when n = 2), if both times are successful, the third change suggestion effect is always executed. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies to the case of n = 3 and the case of n = 4. In this way, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the period from the start of the variation display to the establishment of the reach state, the same variation. Since the ratio of the next change suggestion effect being executed within the display period (the period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state) is high, the player can execute the change suggestion effect the number of times, especially the success mode. It will be possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] within one variation display period, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The rate of change to a high-degree display mode is high. Specifically, [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed] is 1/2 when the final display mode is the special mode, and the final display mode is the blue mode. In the case, it is 2/3, when the final display mode is the green mode, it is 3/4, when the final display mode is the red mode, it is 4/5, and the final display mode is the gold mode. If it becomes, it is 5/5. In this way, the larger the [number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed / the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed], the higher the rate at which the active display changes to the display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. Also pays attention to the relationship between the number of times the change suggestion effect is executed and the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, which can improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the more times the success mode change suggestion effect is continuously executed, the higher the rate of change to the display mode having a high expectation of big hit. Specifically, the number of continuous change suggestion effects of the success mode is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is the blue mode, and when the final display mode is the green mode. It is 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is the red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is the gold mode. As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed, and how many times in succession.

Further, in this example, when the final display mode is the same display color, it is easy to select a change pattern in which the number of continuous change suggestion effects of the success mode is larger. For example, in the case of the blue mode, the change pattern 012 (2 consecutive) is selected more frequently than the change pattern 013 (not continuous), and in the green mode, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (2 consecutive). The rate of selection of 014 (3 consecutive) is higher, and in the case of the red aspect, the rate of selection of change pattern 016 (4 consecutive) is higher than that of change pattern 017 (3 consecutive). In this way, even if the display color is finally the same, the player's expectation can be further increased by making it easy for the change suggestion effect of the success mode to be continuous.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the mode (success mode or failure mode) of the change suggestion effect based on the change pattern shown in FIG. 23-16 determined at the time of winning the start. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on whether each change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode, and whether or not to execute the next change suggestion effect. decide. The types of change suggestion effects include change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character. There is a change suggestion effect E, in which E appears.

The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 23-17 when the change suggestion effect executed the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect executed the n + 1th time is executed in the change pattern determined at the time of starting winning. Select the table of "Success mode, next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Success mode, next effect execution], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 23-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a successful mode and the change suggestion effect executed at the n + 1th time is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning. Select the table of "Success mode, no next production execution". When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 23-17 when the nth change suggestion effect is a failure mode and the n + 1th change suggestion effect is executed. Select the table of [Failure mode, next production execution]. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, next effect execution], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

In the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 shows in FIG. 23-17 when the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the change suggestion effect is not executed at the n + 1th time. Select the table of [Failure mode, no next production execution]. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [Failure mode, no next effect execution], character A is 35%, character B is 30%, character C is 30%, character D is 5%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability.

The effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect for each change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 23-17. Therefore, when the nth and n + 1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E are selected in the n + 1th change suggestion effect. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time may be executed, while n + 1 There is a possibility that the change suggestion effect A in which the same character A appears at the nth time is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the change suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 23-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of becoming a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of becoming a successful mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a 100% probability of being a successful mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the expectation that the next change suggestion effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In that case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the change suggestion effect this time is the last).

In this way, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high expectation for big hits differs depending on the type of character appearing in the production, so the player pays attention to which type of character appears. Will be done. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

In addition to the effect types shown in FIGS. 23-17, for example, an effect type may be provided in which the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is low and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also low. An effect type may be provided in which the display mode of the display changes at a high rate and the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed is also high.

(Specific examples of active change production and change suggestion production)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 23-18 to 23-20. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 23-18, 23-19 (9) to (12), and 23-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is the gold mode when the start prize is won. This is an example of a case where it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 018. .. Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 23-18 and 23-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 displays the final display mode in green when the start prize is won. An example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. Is.

In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect D of the success mode based on the decision and the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect, and the character E appears in the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect E.

In FIG. 23-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the image display device 5 executes a variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. Indicates the state of.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect A of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23-18 (1), a character A appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character A performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, followed by FIG. 23. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character A hits the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-18 (3), the active display 30TM003a (white triangle display) of a special aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the first change suggestion effect. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect B of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23-18 (4), a character B appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character B performs an action of throwing a ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed, followed by FIG. 23. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character B hits the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the special mode active display 30TM003a is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-18 (6), the active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in the blue mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the second change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect C of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23-18 (7), a character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 23-18 (8), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character C hits the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003b in the blue aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-19 (9), the active display 30TM003d (green circle display) in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the third change suggestion effect. Green.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 23-19 (11), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the green mode active display 30TM003d is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-19 (12), the active display 30TM003c (red circle display) in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fourth change suggestion effect. To.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect E of the success mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which the range of the crack is expanded is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (15), an image (screen crack image 30TM210) in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is cracked is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image is displayed in which the character E performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (16), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character E hits the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003c in the red aspect is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (17), the active display 30TM003e (golden circle display) in the golden mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 in response to the completion of the fifth change suggestion effect. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-20 (18), the screen crack image 30TM210 displayed in the image display device 5 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 23-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. A reach state is established in which the same decorative symbol ("7" in this example) is stopped in the display area, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). The production is executed. Here, as described above, at the timing when the reach is established, the active display 30TM003e in the gold mode is hidden, and the square frame showing the active display area 30TM103 is also hidden. The hidden information will not be displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 23-18 and 23-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to the green mode when the start prize is won. This is an example in which it is decided that the mode at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and when the variable display based on the start winning prize is started, the change pattern of the active display is decided to be the change pattern 014. ..

In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears for the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the above, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the change suggestion effect of, and to execute the change suggestion effect D in which the character D appears for the fourth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that the decision is made and that the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode is executed based on the fact that the fifth change suggestion effect is not executed.

The effect examples (first change suggestion effect to third change suggestion effect) shown in FIGS. 23-18 (1) to 23-19 (9) are the same as the above-mentioned effect example of the change pattern 018. Will be omitted, and examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 23-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the failure mode in accordance with the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 23-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d is displayed, followed by an effect image. As shown in FIG. 23-19 (20), an effect image showing that the ball thrown by the character D did not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the above-mentioned effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed, and instead, the character D throws and does not hit. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is completed, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change from before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

Then, as shown in FIG. 23-19 (22), a reach state is established in which the same decorative symbol (“4” in this example) is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and “reach !! The character "" is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103), and the reach effect is executed. Here, since the active display area 30TM103 is hidden at the timing when the reach state is established as described above, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is not displayed until the variable display of the notice target is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 23-18 (1) to 23-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 is in a state where the image display device 5 is continuously executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols. , The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative symbol is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and the reach state is established. That is, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right, changes the direction of the variation display, and changes the reach state. It doesn't hold. According to such a configuration, the mode of the variation display of the decorative symbol does not change during the period in which the change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern, so that the change suggestion effect can be more noticed.

Although FIG. 23-16 shows a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is not continuous, the change pattern is not limited to such a form, and a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is continuous may be provided. .. Further, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode. For example, a change pattern may be provided in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed three times in a row and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed twice in succession. Further, although the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed once or more, an effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode of the active display does not change because the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed even once.

In the example shown in FIGS. 23-16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, and the active display is always displayed when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed. An example in which the display mode changes is shown, but not limited to such a form, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, it is active at a higher rate than when the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. Any configuration may be used as long as the display mode of the display changes. For example, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display does not change even when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed may be provided, and the change of the failure mode may be provided. Even when the suggestion effect is executed, an effect pattern that changes the display mode of the active display may be provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 23-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode in which the expectation of big hit is one step higher (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode. An example of changing from a blue mode, a blue mode to a green mode, a green mode to a red mode, and a red mode to a gold mode) has been shown. May provide a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes from a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is two or more steps higher (for example, from a normal mode to a green mode, from a blue mode to a golden mode, etc.). Further, the rate at which the display mode changes in two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of the character that appears). For example, the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears. When is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is low, and when the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate at which the display mode changes by two or more steps is high. Is also good. Further, when the change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages without fail.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at the timing before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Specifically, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation that revariates after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is executed one or more times, before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol The change suggestion effect of the success mode may be executed. For example, when n temporary stops are executed, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (a total of n times of the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed), and then. By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the n + 1th temporary stop is not executed. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed even once, the effect pattern in which only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed. May be provided. Further, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously performed n + 1 times. An effect pattern may be provided that is executed and does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode.

In such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started (character appears) when the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped, and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (character). Takes an action to change the display mode of the active display). For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and takes an action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed for the first time. After the re-variation of is started, character B appears and takes an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the special mode to the blue mode, and then the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-variation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, by making sure that the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period for changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol) do not overlap, the change suggestion effect can be focused on. At the same time, it is possible not to reduce the effect of the effect when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped.

When executing an effect of changing the variable display direction of the decorative symbol from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started while the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the vertical direction (character appears). , It is preferable to end the change suggestion effect (the character takes an action to change the display mode of the active display) before changing the variable display direction of the decorative pattern to the horizontal direction. For example, immediately after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the first character appears and takes an action, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative symbol changes from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and take an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by preventing the execution period of one change suggestion effect from overlapping with the timing at which the change display direction of the decorative symbol changes, the change suggestion effect can be noticed and the change display of the decorative symbol can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect when the direction is changed from being lowered.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the change suggestion effect is a display mode of the hold display. It may be a production that suggests that For example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 23-16 may be used as a change pattern when changing the display mode of the hold display, and when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. , When the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

In the above embodiment, in both the success mode change suggestion effect and the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character acts on the same action (active display or hold display, for example, a ball). An example of performing an action (throwing action) is shown, but not limited to such a form, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the appearing character performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. In addition, the action performed by the appearing character may be different between the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode. For example, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the active display or the hold display to be changed may be displayed. The action of throwing the ball in the direction of (active display or hold display) is performed, and in the failure mode change suggestion effect, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or hold display (active display or hold display) is performed. It is also possible to perform a production that does not work).

In the above embodiment, the greater the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within the predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the establishment of the reach state, the more the next change suggestion effect is executed within the predetermined period. The higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the expectation of big hit is shown. .. However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo-ream symbol that will be re-variated (pseudo-ream) after the temporary stop). It may be a period, or it may be a period from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol after the re-variation of the decorative symbol (that is, the period between the pseudo-reams). The predetermined period may be a period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the first stop of any of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right, and all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. It may be a period until the confirmation is stopped.

In the above embodiment, when the change suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, a plurality of patterns may exist from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the ratio of the next change suggestion effect to the success mode is higher than when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation level. May be high. Further, when the change suggestion effect is executed many times, the interval may be gradually shortened, and the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased accordingly. According to such a form, when the player finishes the change suggestion effect of 1, whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed and also the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. You can become interested and improve your interests.

In the above embodiment, the rate of changing the display mode of the active display may be different depending on the current set values (1 to 6) for the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the proportion of the active display displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher than when the set value is low (1 to 3). You may do so. Further, the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, 3 times or more) when the set value is high (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3). The rate at which the pattern is selected may be high, that is, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed and the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuous may be high. Further, compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) is a change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, an effect in which a character X having a low appearance frequency appears). May be made to be executed at a higher rate.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation,
An advantageous state control means capable of executing control regarding the advantageous state based on a set value, and an advantageous state control means.
An information output means that can output setting value information that can specify which setting value is set, and
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, at least a predetermined suggestion effect that can be executed during the variable display, a specific suggestion effect that can be executed in the advantageous state, and a plurality of times based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is provided with a specific effect that can be executed over the variable display of the above, and an effect execution means that can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a different execution ratio according to a set setting value.
The reliability of the suggestion of the set value differs depending on whether the predetermined suggestion effect is executed or the specific suggestion effect is executed.
The presentation execution means may be more capable of executing predetermined suggested directing a plurality of types of predetermined suggested state like including special predetermined suggested embodiment, the specific suggestions more plural kinds of specific suggestions state like including special specific suggestion embodiments The production can be performed,
If the predetermined suggested presentation by a special predetermined suggest embodiment is executed, the than the predetermined suggested presentation is performed by the different predetermined suggested embodiment is specially prescribed suggested embodiments, trust suggests a high advantageous set value High degree,
If said specific suggestion effect by special specified suggest embodiment is executed, the special specified than when the specific suggested presentation by different specific suggested embodiment is executed with the suggestion embodiment, trust suggests a high advantageous set value High degree,
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the effect executing means does not execute the predetermined suggestion effect according to the special predetermined suggestion mode and the specific suggestion effect according to the special specific suggestion mode. , The predetermined suggestion effect according to a predetermined suggestion mode different from the special predetermined suggestion mode, and the specific suggestion effect according to a specific suggestion mode different from the special specific suggestion mode can be executed.
further,
Display control means that can display the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display,
It is provided with a change suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes.
The change suggestion effect execution means can execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode as the change suggestion effect.
When the number of times the success mode change suggestion effect is executed in the predetermined period of the variable display is a predetermined number of times, the change is made in a specific period which is a period after the predetermined period of the variable display than when it is less than the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which suggestion effects are executed is high.

Images